Home

read catalog

1. 9 20 Biopsy daid g lu ele 9 20 Using the Biopsy Kit EE 9 21 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Biopsy Kit 9 23 Assembling the Biopsy Kit Reference Manual Samsung Medison provides an additional MySono U6 Reference Manual English 20 Ii Indication for Use 25ne does 1 3 Contraindicatio sie 1 3 m Safety Information necu ce eese oae 1 4 Safety UE 1 4 INTE 1 6 OR EE 1 7 Prevention of Electric Shock ss 1 7 EGG Relateclntenation eS 1 8 EECH 1 8 EMISIT eeN eee E A A EA 1 9 Nu E E E ETE 1 9 Ix Mechanical Step eege 1 16 Safety le 1 16 Moving the Eouipment EE 1 17 isBiological Safety rede 1 18 EE DT 1 18 STALIN ecce c 1 31 m Environmental Protection 1 32 isl Battery Pack rrearen 1 33 Chapter 1 Safety s Indication for Use The MySono U6 Diagnostic Ultrasound System and transducers are intended for diagnostic ultrasound imaging and fluid analysis of the human body The clinical applications include Fetal Abdominal Pediatric Small Organ Neonatal Cephalic Adult Cephalic Trans rectal Trans vaginal Muscular Skeletal Conventional Superficial Cardiac Adult Cardiac Pediatric Peripheral vessel Contraindications The MySono U6 system is not intended for ophthalmic use or any use causing the acoustic beam to pass through the eye CAUTION P Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician
2. Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit Head All Distance cm mm Body All Distance cm mm Pancreas Tail All Distance cm mm Duct All Distance cm mm Stomach Wall All Distance cm mm Bowel Small Bowel Wall All Distance cm mm Large Bowel Wall All Distance cm mm 5 77 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Abd Vascular Measurement Menu General Abdomen M Portal V M Hepatic V gt C Hepatic A Splenic V gt Splenic A Mid Aorta gt Rt Renal Y gt Lt Renal V gt Rt Renal A gt Lt Renal A Mid SMA IMA Mid IVC gt Celiac A Figure 5 21 Abdomen Vascular Measurement Menu Item Item Mode Method Unit Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace M Portal V M Hepatic V Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Splenic V Mid IVC Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s Rt Renal V DurT PW Time ms Lt Renal V Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace C Hepatic A R Hepatic A Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace L Hepatic A PSV PW Velocity cm s m s Splenic A Mid Aorta EDV PW Velocity cm s m s Rt Renal A Lt Renal A 96StA All Calculation after area measurement 96 Mid SMA i i Ik StD All Calculation after distance measurement Celiac A Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm
3. Application 3 E v Probes 5 Ej g H a s 5 g Uu o 5 2 3 a E a 8 I o Sg u o H 2 3 d S 2 8 E 3 5 o e lt gt amp 2 z C2 5 TIB TIS TIS C2 8 TIB TIS TIS C4 9 TIS TIS TIS LN5 12 TIS TIS TIS P2 4 TIS TIS TIS EVN4 9 TIB TIS TIS 3DC2 6 TIB TIS TIS 3D4 9 TIS TIS TIS CW2 0 TIS 9 7 _ MySonoU6 Operation Manual Ultrasound Transmission Gel Using an inappropriate ultrasound gel may damage the probe For proper transmission of the acoustic beam only use ultrasound transmission gel approved by Samsung Medison WARNING P Do not use mineral oil oil based solutions or other non approved materials as they may cause damage to the probe P Do not use gels that contain any of the following agents Acetone Methanol Denatured Ethyl Alcohol Mineral Oil lodine Lanolin Any lotions or gels containing aromatic substances 9 8 Chapter 9 Probes Sheath Use Sheaths are recommended for clinical applications of an invasive nature including intraoperative transrectal transvaginal and biopsy procedures Samsung Medison does not supply sheaths so appropriate sheaths should be purchased independently Installing the Sheath WARNING P Always keep sheaths in a sterile state P Sheaths are disposable Do not reuse them gt If sheaths are torn or soiled after use clean and disinfect the probe gt In neuro
4. Document Font Measure Result Font Font Name Helvetica Verdana Font Size 11 11 Font Color White Yellow SC NOTE Certain fonts may not appear correctly on the screen 7 21 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Title You can specify the information that is displayed in the title area on the screen E Institute Enter the name of the hospital institution where the product is installed N NOTE These special characters cannot be entered W E Date The current date is displayed To change the date click EG NOTE Tx P You cannot change the date and time when a patient ID has been registered To change the date and time you should finish the current examination by pressing the End Exam button on the control panel P You can select a year from 2006 to 2027 How to set the date and time 1 Click BECH next to the Date or Time field 2 Usethe trackball and the Set button to configure the date and time 3 When the date and time have been properly set click Apply to apply changes Click OK to close the Date and Time window Click Cancel or the Exit button to cancel Figure 7 12 Date amp Time 7 22 Pm Chapter 7 Utilities E Date Format Used to configure the date format Select a format by using the combo button The date format that you specify will be applied to various date fields in Patient Information E Time The current time is displayed E Time Format Specify the time f
5. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Steer Speed Angle SV Size BaseLine Scale p 10 Step Doppler Invert Simultaneous Angle AutoCalc Mean Trace PP 60 Step g AutoCalc Display Format DynamicRange Spectrum Ehn Direction Power Frequency Doppler Avg Filter TDW 4 25 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Doppler Invert Press the soft menu dial button 1 Each time the button is pressed the speed indicator for a spectrum is inverted E Simultaneous Press the soft menu s dial button 2 to turn the Simultaneous option on or off NOTE This option appears in the PW menu only when Utility gt Setup gt General gt Scan Mode gt Simultaneous Mode is set to Allow If the Simultaneous option is turned on it will be possible to view real time 2D and spectral Doppler images at the same time If the option is not turned on however you will only be able to view the image from one of the modes The Simultaneous function decreases Doppler PRF thus decreasing the measurable speed range E Angle Adjusting the sample volume angle enables accurate speed measurement Rotate the soft menu s dial button 3 to adjust the angle in 10 increments Pressing the soft menu s dial button 3 changes the angle in the order of 60 0 and 60 E SV Size Used to specify the sample volume size Rotate the soft menu s dial button 4 and set to a value between 0 5 and 15 E AutoCalc Press the soft menu s dial button 4 to t
6. Description vie Network port Do not sit on control panel 8 Do not push the product G9 Do not lean against the product Follow the operation manual SSI MySonoU6 Operation Manual LABEL Warning and caution labels that contain information and instructions concerning the protection of the product can be found on the exterior of the product aui SAMSUNG MEDISON co LTD Cli 42 Teheran ro 108 gil Gangnam gu Please keep this operation manual close to Seoul Korea the product as a reference when using the system www samsungmedison com CAUTION Bewahren Sie bitte diese Bedienungsanleitung bei der Benutzung als Referenz in der Nahe des Ger tes auf e Fe SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS UK LTD Veuillez conserver ce manuel comme r f rence Blackbushe Business Park Saxony Way proximit du produit lors de l utilisation du syst me Yateley Hampshire GU46 6GG UK Do not remove the system s covers hazardous MODEL MODELL MOD LE MySono U6 voltages are present inside The cabinet panels must POWER NETZ ALIMENTATION 19V 7 9A WARNING be in place while the system is in use 150W Max ffnen Sie das Ger t nicht Im Inneren gibt es lebensgefahrliche elektrische Spannungen Das Ger t C darf nur vollst ndig und unge ffnet betrieben werden 0123 A Ne pas enlever les panneaux de protection du syst me il y a de l lectricit l int rieur Ces panneaux de protectio
7. Frame average Edge Enhancement Blurring Gamma scale windowing Image orientation left right and up down rotation White on black black on white Zoom Measurement Trackball operation of multiple cursors 2D mode Linear measurements and area measurements using elliptical approximation or trace M mode Continuous readout of distance time and slope rate Doppler mode Velocity and trace Auxiliary USB ECG USB Foot Switch IPX1 External Monitor External DVD Multi USB Video Printer USB Laser Printer USB Hard Disk Drive USB Flash Memory Media User Interface English German French Italian Spanish Russian 24 Pressure Limits Operating 700 1060hPa Storage 700 1060hPa Chapter 2 Introduction Humidity Limits Operating 30 7596 Storage amp Shipping 20 9096 Temperature Limits Operating 10 35 C Storage amp Shipping 25 60 C 25 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual es Product Configuration This Product consists of monitor control panel console peripheral devices and probes 26 Pr Monitor Control Panel Console Probe Port 000o Handle Figure 2 1 Product Components inciples of Operation Medical ultrasound images are created by computer and digital memory from the transmission and reception of mechanical high frequency waves applied through a probe The mechanical ultrasound waves spread through the bo
8. P Check the EFW Reference You can select or change it from Utility gt Measure Setup gt OB gt Tables SCH NOTE This function is not available in 3D mode E Measurement Methods 1 Select EFW in the measurement menu Alternatively click the User key if you have assigned the User key to EFW Measure The OB measurements are taken 2 Measure the items for EFW calculation using the trackball and the Set button 3 The result of the first measurement is displayed on the screen and the next measurement is taken 4 Once all measurements have been taken the EFW is displayed on the screen EFW measurements and their sequence are as follows 5 37 SI MySonoU6 Operation Manual Reference Measure Item by Order Campbell AC Hadlock BPD AC Hadlock1 AC gt FL Hadlock2 BPD gt AC gt FL Hadlock3 AC gt FL gt HC Hadlock4 BPD HC gt AC gt FL Hansmann BPD gt TTD Merz BPD gt AC Osaka BPD gt FTA gt FL Shepard BPD gt AC Shinozuka1 BPD gt AC gt FL Shinozuka2 BPD gt APTD TTD gt SL Shinozuka3 BPD gt APTD TTD gt FL Ferrero AC gt FL Higginbottom AC Thurnau BPD gt AC Warsof BPD gt AC Weiner1 ACAHC Weiner2 AC gt FL gt HC Woo BPD gt AC gt FL 5 38 Changing Measurement Sequence To change the measurement sequence go Sequential Measurement Viewing EFW calculation result again o Utility gt MeasureSetup gt OB gt Tables gt EFW When the User k
9. Use the front edge or boundary point of a probe to make the start and end points of a measurement object more distinct Make sure that the probe direction is always aligned during measurement 56 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Accuracy Table The following tables show the accuracy of the measurements that are available when using the product Ensure that the results of measurement accuracy checks are kept within the ranges specified in the tables Except for certain applications or probes the following accuracy ranges should be maintained for measurement of a straight distance A contact Samsung Medisons service department NOTE To ensure accurate measurements an accuracy check should be performed at least once per year If the measurement accuracy falls outside the ranges specified in the following table 2D Mode Measurements System Tolerance Test Accuracy Range Whichever is greater Methodology Based on 9 Axial Distance lt 4 or 2mm Phantom Acquisition 0 01 25 cm Lateral Distance lt 496 or 2mm Phantom Acquisition 0 01 35 cm Axial Resolution lt 496 or 3mm Phantom Acquisition 0 01 25 cm Lateral Resolution lt t 496 or 3mm Phantom Acquisition 0 01 35 cm M Mode Measurements System Tolerance Test Accuracy Range whichever is greater Methodology Based on 9 Depth lt 5 or 3mm Phantom Acquisition 1 25 cm
10. gt The method of application or use of the device is described in the manual Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis and Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes MySonoU6 Operation Manual es Safety Information Please read the following safety information before using this product It is relevant to the ultrasound system the probes the recording devices and any of the optional equipment MySono U6 is intended for use by or by the order of and under the supervision of a licensed physician who is qualified for direct use of the medical device Safety Symbols The International Electro Technical Commission IEC has established a set of symbols for medical electronic equipment which classify a connection or warn of potential hazards The classifications and symbols are shown below Symbols Description Symbols Description AC alternating current voltage source USB port DC direct current voltage source Risk of electric shock i A S Microphone port Audio port Isolated patient connection Type BF applied part 9 x lt N Protection against the effects of immersion Power switch T x Protection against dripping water Caution Probe port Refer to the operation manual ESD electrostatic discharge caution Indicates dangerous voltages over 1 000V AC or over 1 500V DC Qu Video DVI I port Symbols Description Symbols Chapter 1 Safety
11. Chapter 9 Probes Available functions based on the type of probe and application being used in MySono U6 are as follows Probes Application G 2 Ed e D DMR Q SCAN ECG Biopsy C2 5 Abdomen O Gynecology OB C2 8 Abdomen Gynecology OB C4 9 Pediatric Abdomen Vascular LN5 12 Musculoskeletal Small Parts Vascular P2 4 Abdomen Cardiac TCD EVN4 9 Gynecology OB Urology 3DC2 6 Abdomen Gynecology OB 3D4 9 Urology OB Gynecology CW2 0 Cardiac x O0 lOo o o o o x x x o looj o o oj x x x oi oi o oo o sxjlsxxIi x x o o o jxjsxl x o o oj o x s x s xx o o o o o o lt lt XIXI XIXI X XIX X X XIXI OJ oO oO KK XJ K XI X o o xX nx O0 lOo o oi o oj ojojojojoo ojoj o o o o o o o oco nx 0 0 Oo0 o o o ojJojojoj o ooj oj o o o o o o oo o O ox o KL KL K OL K OO Kx XI OO XJ kK o ovx ovx o o ox ze OIlOo o o o o o o oj x xxioljoijo j x xi ixiloioio o o 95 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Probes Application PD C2 5 Abdomen Gynecology OB X Except Fetal Heart O Except Fetal Heart C2 8 Abdomen X Gynecology X OB X Except Fetal Heart o O Except Fetal Heart C4 9
12. Endo Thick Distance cm mm Cervix All Measurement of Volume ml Cervix L Distance cm mm Cervix H Distance cm mm Cervix W Distance cm mm Calculation after Distance All ml Measurement Distance cm mm Distance cm mm Distance cm mm Uterine Tumor 1 Cervical Tumor Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Rt Uterine A Lt Uterine A Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Endometrial R PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s 5 40 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All All Calculation after Distance ini Measurement P All Distance cm mm H All Distance cm mm Rt Ovary Rt Ovarian Mass W All Distance cm mm Lt Ovary Lt Ovarian Mass Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s Rt Follicles 1 12 All Volume calculated after distance cm mm and Lt Follicles measurement ml Rt Lt Cyst All Al Calculation after Distance T Measurement Cyst Rt Lt L All Distance cm mm Rt Lt H All Distance cm mm
13. mm Vesl Dist Distance cm mm Volume Flow Auto Automatic calculation ml m Volume Flow D Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow TAMV Doppler spectrum trace cm s m s Vesl Area Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5 64 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations LE Vein Calculation Takes lower extremity vein measurements The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P Itis convenient to calculate each measurement value on the spectral doppler image P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 General Measurement Menu civ aiu aisi gt CFV gt PFY gt SFY gt GSV gt Popliteal Y gt LSV gt ATV gt PTV gt Peroneal Y gt General gt Vol Flow HR Figure 5 15 General LE Vein Measurement Menu 5 65 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Method Unit CIV Auto Trace Doppler spectrum trace IIV EIV Limited Trace Doppler spectrum trace CFV Vmax Velocity cm s m s PFV SFV DurT Time ms GSV Popliteal V LSV ATV Vesl Dist Distance cm mm PTV Peroneal V Auto Trace Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace Doppler s
14. 4 53 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Preset Used to select or edit a 3D mode preset Pressing this button brings up the Preset screen Preset Select Default or User1 through User5 as the preset to use Pressing Default loads the probe s general preset E Load Preset Loads the selected preset and exits from the Preset screen E Save Preset Saves the current preset E Rename Change the name of the selected Rendering Preset Pressing this button brings up the Name window After changing the name click OK to save the changed name Click Cancel to cancel the change Render Setup Specify the image rendering method Pressing this button brings up the Gray Render Mode screen Gray Render Mode is used to specify how volume data acquired with the gray method should be rendered into 3D images E Render Mode 1 Used to configure Render Mode 1 P Surface Represents 3D images in the Ray Casting method which shows the shell of an image with curved surfaces gt Smooth Represents 3D images that are smoother than Surface gt Max Represents 3D images at maximum intensity It can be useful for the observation of bone structures in a human body gt Min Represents 3D images at minimum intensity It can be useful for observation of vessels or hollow parts in a human body 454 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes gt X Ray Represents 3D images in terms of average intensity It shows images similar to X ray images E
15. 7 51 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Clear Deletes all jobs DICOM Log Click Log on the DICOM Job Status window to display the DICOM Log window This is used to manage the history of all DICOM services performed on this product E Log Settings Used to specify the log file management method gt Delete Archived Log Afterwards Used to specify how long to keep the log file Enter a number of days If the specified time has elapsed after the log file was created the file is deleted from the system gt Log File Maximum Size Specify the maximum size of a log file that can be archived Enter a number of kilobytes A log file that is larger than the specified size is not archived on the system and is deleted immediately E DICOM Log Displays a list of log files with their information gt Select All Selects all log files gt Delete Selected Files Deletes the selected log files gt Copy Selected Files Copies the selected log file to external storage media gt View Selected File Displays the details of the selected log file on the screen gt Refresh Updates the information of a log file 7 52 Delete archived log afterwards Log File Maximum size Kbytes Chapter 7 Utilities Log Settings 3 days 1000 Kbytes Dicom Log Size Select All Ok S lected Files elected Files Refresh Figure 7 31 DICOM Log 7 53 MySonoU6 Operation Manual AutoCalc Select the AutoCalc tab on the Setup
16. Equation Units 10 1 304 0 05281 AC 0 1938 FL Input Unit 0 004 AC FL Output Unit Input Value Ranges Low opp High op NN s ET abs sat 1 1 2 Pl 7 0 log10 Clear Back Delete Tolerance Information Figure 7 43 User Equation E View amp Modify References 1 Under Selection select a preset 2 Press and the Editor screen will appear 3 View or edit the references E EFW Sequential Measurement Defined key User Key Setup Settings are applied when EFW is measured by pressing the User 2 NOTE This setting is necessary when you set EFW Measure for User Key in Utility Setup User button Configure the order of EFW measurements to be taken when the User button is pressed Select a measurement by using the trackball and the Set button and change its position by using the arrows 7 72 Calc amp Graph Chapter 7 Utilities Select the sub tab Calc amp Graph under the OB tab You can specify settings for calculation and graphs E Auto calculations Specify an item that will be calculated automatically For example if the MAD checkbox is selected when APD and TAD are measured the measurements are used to calculate MAD automatically and display the result on the screen The results of automatic calculation may affect GA and EDD information E Ratio calculations Specify a measurement item for which a ratio will be calculated For example if the FL BPD checkbox is selected when F
17. GGG a dangerous situation If You Need Assistance If you need the service manual or any assistance with the equipment please contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service Department or one of their worldwide customer service representatives immediately vi Revision History The revision history of this manual is as the follows DOCUMENT DATE NOTE M359 E10000 01 2012 05 15 Initial Release System Upgrades and Manual Set Updates An upgrade to this product refers to an upgrade to its hardware and or software When this product is upgraded an updated operation manual will be published to reflect the changes to in the product Please make sure that the revised version of this manual matches that of the accompanying product If not please contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service Department Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter1 Safety dication for CSS ccs pss 1 3 Contraindicatii sr T 1 3 Safety Infor lol Eosieeioi dinh aid nd unes te apod E ERR 1 4 Safety Symbols olde Electrical Safety ettet eet rael ska tre ee 1 7 Prevention of Electric SROCK sessscscssscsssssasssccsesscxsssscsosssecosscssssessosscsosssevasscecsssevosecocassevasscscsssasosseseaszsvessseosssseasasavsuzetosasdioss 1 7 ECG Related NIOMA OI ee 1 8 ER
18. Operation Manual MySono UG SAMSUNG MEDISON WARRANTY Samsung Medison provides the following warranty to the purchaser of this unit This warranty is valid for a period of one year from the date of installation and covers all problems caused by faulty workmanship orfaulty material Samsung Medison will as sole and exclusive remedy and at no charge replace any such defective unit returned to Samsung Medison within the designated warranty period The warranty does not cover damages and loss caused by outside factors including but not limited to fire flood storm tidal wave lightning earthquake theft abnormal conditions of operation and intentional destruction of the equipment Damage caused by equipment relocation is not covered The warranty is void in cases where the equipment has been damaged as a result of an accident misuse abuse dropping or when attempts to modify or alter any part or assembly of the equipment have taken place Parts with cosmetic defects or deterioration will not be replaced Replacement of batteries training materials and supplies are not covered Samsung Medison will not be responsible for incidental or consequential damages of any kind arising from or connected with the use of the equipment Samsung Medison will not be responsible for any loss damage or injury resulting from a delay in services rendered under the warranty This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or
19. 2D RVIDd IVSd LYIDd LVPWd All LYs 2D IVSs LVIDs LVPWs RVAWd LVEDV A4C LVESV A4C LVEDV A2C LVESV A2C gt Tissue Doppler gt Lt Inflow gt Lt Outflow gt Pulm Veins gt Hepatic Veins Figure 5 9 Ped Echo Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All LVd 2D All Continuous measurement RVIDd All Distance cm mm IVSd All Distance cm mm LVIDd All Distance cm mm LVPWd All Distance cm mm All LVs 2D All Continuous measurement IVSs All Distance cm mm LV RV 2D LVIDs All Distance cm mm LVPWs All Distance cm mm RVAWd All Distance cm mm LVEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml LVESV A4C All Dist 20 ml LVEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml LVESV A2C All Dist 20 ml 5 52 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All LV M M Continuous measurement RVIDd M Distance cm mm IVSd M Distance cm mm LVIDd M Distance cm mm LV RV M LVPWd M Distance cm mm IVSs M Distance cm mm LVIDs M Distance cm mm LVPWs M Distance cm mm RVAWs M Distance cm mm All LV TDI PW Continuous measurement LV Peak E PW Velocity cm s m s LV Peak A PW Velocity cm s m s neun LV Peak S PW Velocity cm s m s All RV TDI PW Continuous measurement RV Peak E PW Velocity cm s m s RV Peak A PW Velocity cm s m s RV Peak S PW Velocity
20. 3 dial button beneath the soft menu B Sensitivity Used to adjust the color image sensitivity Rotate the soft menu s dial button 4 and set to a value between 8 and 31 When this value increases the sensitivity of a color image improves but the frame rate becomes lower E Balance The range of a color image is adjusted by comparing the gray levels of 2D images with the doppler signal values of color images Rotate the soft menu s dial button 5 and set to a value between 1 and 16 When the Balance value increases the color image also appears in the part where the gray level of a 2D image is high the bright part increasing the range of the color image E Scale Use the soft menu s dial button 6 to adjust scale Rotating the dial button in the clockwise direction increases the PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency displaying a wider range of blood flow speed Rotating the dial button in the counterclockwise direction decreases the PRF displaying a narrower range of blood flow speed E Color Format Select C mode to use Rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 and select between Color B W and B W Only E Color Mode Used to specify the display method in Color Doppler mode Rotate the soft menu s dial button 2 and select between Velocity and Vel Var Vel is an abbreviated form of velocity and Var is an abbreviated form of variance 4 18 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes E Filter Filters out low frequency Doppler signals p
21. Adjust the brightness and contrast of a DICOM image when saving it The saved image can be viewed with any PACS device that has DICOM VOI LUT implemented gt Window Center Enter a value for the DICOM Tag 0028 1050 setting The setting value indicates the brightness of the image that is displayed by the storage service The image is getting darker if the value is set to 128 or higher Note that this function can be used only when it is supported by the storage service gt Window Width Enter a value for the DICOM Tag 0028 1051 setting The setting value indicates the contrast of an image that is displayed by the storage service Relative to 256 higher values result in lower contrast Note that this function is available only when it is supported by the storage service Chapter 7 Utilities Print Server Information Select PRINT under Services Configure the Print Service using DICOM NOTE P You can configure a printer connected to the DICOM network only P Depending on the printer some of the following functions may not be available Before configuring a printer please refer to the printer s user manual or the DICOM Conformance Statement E Color Specify whether to use colors Select Grayscale or RGB E Format Specify the paper layout Select from 1x1 1x2 2x2 2x3 3x3 3x4 3x5 4x4 4x5 and 4x6 E Orientation Specify the paper orientation Select Landscape or Portrait E Magnification When resizing
22. Center frequency of the transducer system mode combination MHz Since the ultrasonic path during an examination is likely to pass through varying lengths and types of tissue it is difficult to estimate the true n Situ intensity An attenuation factor of 0 3 is used for general reporting purposes Therefore the In Situ value which is commonly reported uses the following formula In Situ derated Water e 0069 I Since this value is not the true n Situ intensity the term derated is used 1 27 MySonoU6 Operation Manual The maximum derated and the maximum water values do not always occur under the same operating conditions therefore the reported maximum water and derated values may not be related to the n Situ derated formula For example a multi zone array transducer that has the greatest water value intensities in its deepest zone the same transducer may have its largest derated intensity in one of its shallowest focal zones Acoustic Output and Measurement Since the first usage of diagnostic ultrasound the possible human biological effects bioeffects of ultrasound exposure have been studied by various scientific and medical institutions In October 1987 the American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine AIUM ratified a report prepared by its Bioeffects Committee Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound J Ultrasound Med Sept 1988 Vol 7 No 9 Supplement sometimes referred to as the Stowe
23. If there are saved images available for the current exam the information and saved images for the exam appear when SONOVIEW starts WARNING Make sure to register a patient information before saving images or using SONOVIEW All diagnosis information in the product is saved and managed for each patient ID As a result saving images without entering a patient ID may result in a loss of and or critical errors in previously saved images Exam Mode Press Exam in the upper left corner of the screen The button will appear in yellow In the Exam Mode you can review the current or saved exam Exam Mode Screen Exams for each patient ID are displayed by date in a tree on the left side of the screen The numbers in parentheses represent the number of saved images To show or hide exams use the trackball and the Set button to select a desired ID 6 18 Image Management Image Scroll The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the screen Use the soft menu dial button 2 Image Scroll or the Ext Menu dial button Rotating the dial button to the left displays the previous page image while rotating it to the right displays the next page image However this button may not be used when the number of exams saved is less than the number of images that appear on a page under the current layout Selecting Exam Use the trackball and the Set button to select a desired exam from the list on the left side of the screen The select
24. In the GYN information input screen even if Ovul Date is entered LMP and EDD will not be calculated automatically gt For other gynecological information refer to the OB section Day of Cycle Height Ovul Date Para Weight Gravida BSA Aborta HR Ectopic Figure 3 5 Study Information Gynecology Adult Echo In Category select Adult Echo Enter additional information for Cardiac m BP Enter systolic diastolic pressure Blood Pressure E Additional Information Select the applicable check boxes Smoker Hypertension Diabetes Hyperlipidemia Family History Surgery History Murmur Heart Failure Coronary Heart Disease Angina Myocardial Infarction Jugular Venous Distension Dyspnea Syncope Arrhythmia Rheumatic Heart Disease Congential Heart Disease Heart Valve Disease EE MySonoU6 Operation Manual Figure 3 6 Study Information Adult Echo Ped Echo In Category select Ped Echo Enter pediatric cardiac information E Additional Information Select the applicable check boxes Murmur Dyspnea Palpitation Fever Cyanosis Paroxysm Fainting Chest Pain Cardiomegaly Dextrocardia Pacemaker Family History VSD Ventricular Septal Defect ASD Atrial Septal Defect PDA Patent Ductus Arteriosus COA Coarctation of the Aorta TOF Tetralogy of Fallot PS Pulmonic Stenosis AS Aor
25. Time lt t 596 Signal generator Acquisition 0 01 11 3 sec PW CW Spectral Doppler Mode Doppler System Tolerance Test Accuracy Range Measurement whichever is greater Methodology Based on 9 SC PW 0 1cm s 8 8 m s 0j Velocity t 1596 Phantom Acquisition CW 0 1cm s 19 3 m s Time t 596 Signal Generator Acquisition 10 ms 9 44 s 5 7 MySonoU6 Operation Manual si Basic Measurements Press the Caliper button on the control panel A by Application in this chapter NOTE This function performs a simple measurement such as distance and area regardless of applications For information on measurements for each application please refer to Measurements The available measurement methods vary depending on the current diagnosis mode Please refer to the following table Measurement Diagnosis Modes Measurement Methods Distance 2D M D Distance Line Trace Angle StD M Distance D Velocity D A B D Trace D time Measurement of Circumference and Area 2D M D Ellipse Trace StA Measurement of Volume 2D M D 3 Distance 1 Distance Distance Ellipse Ellipse MOD 5 8 Table 5 1 Basic Measurements by Diagnosis Mode Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Basic Measurement Operations The following is the information on common button operations for basic measurements Distance istanc Area E Volume stance Result Actio
26. Understanding the nature ofthe imaging mode being used allows the sonographerto apply the ALARA principle with informed judgment The probe frequency system set up values scanning techniques and operator experience aid the sonographer in meeting the definition of the ALARA principle The decision as to the amount of acoustic output is in the final analysis up to the system operator This decision must be based on the following factors type of patient type of exam patient history ease or difficulty of obtaining diagnostically useful information and the potential localized heating of the patient due to probe surface temperatures Prudent use of the system occurs when patient exposure is limited to the lowest index reading for the shortest amount of time necessary to achieve acceptable diagnostic results Although a high index reading does not mean that a bioeffect is actually occurring a high index reading should be taken seriously Every effort should be made to reduce the possible effects of a high index reading Limiting exposure time is an effective way to accomplish this goal There are several system controls that the operator can use to adjust the image quality and limit the acoustic intensity These controls are related to the techniques that an operator might use to implement ALARA These controls can be divided into three categories direct indirect and receiver control Direct Controls Application selection and the output in
27. mm PEs All Distance cm mm SVC S D PW Continuous measurement SVC S Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s Shunts SVC D Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s SVC A Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s SVC A Dur PW Time ms IVC S D PW Continuous measurement IVC S Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s IVC D Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s IVC A Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s IVC A Dur PW Time ms 5 50 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit Systemic VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm Plumonic VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm Qp Qs LVOT Diam All Distance cm mm RVOT Diam All Distance cm mm All LV TDI PW Continuous measurement LV Peak E PW Velocity cm s m s LV Peak A PW Velocity cm s m s LV Peak S PW Velocity cm s m s LV AccT PW Time ms Vsus Doppler LV DecT PW Time ms All RV TDI PW Continuous measurement RV Peak E PW Velocity cm s m s RV Peak A PW Velocity cm s m s RV Peak S PW Velocity cm s m s RV AccT PW Time ms RV DecT PW Time ms All LV Tei Index PW Continuous measurement LV TST PW Time ms LV ET PW Time ms LV IVCT PW Time ms minds LV IVRT PW Time ms All RV Tei Index PW Continuous measurement RV TST PW Time ms RV ET PW Time ms RV IVCT PW Time ms RV IVRT PW Time ms HR M PW Heart Rate bpm SSI MySonoU6 Operation Manual Pediatric Measurement Menu Chamber Valve System Cardiac LV 2D All L d
28. substances Always follow the instructions in the user manual to inspect the probe cable case and lens before and after each use Check for cracks broken parts leaks and sharp edges If there is any damage immediately stop using the probe and contact Samsung Medison s service department Using damaged probes may result in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and or users Use and Infection Control of the Probe WARNING No neurosurgical treatments or examinations should be carried out on a patient with Creutzfeldt Jakob disease a critical brain disease caused by a virus If the probe has been used on N such a patient it cannot be sterilized by any method whatsoever CAUTION Sufficient washing and disinfecting must be carried out to prevent infection This is the responsibility of the user who manages and maintains the disinfection procedures for the equipment Always use legally approved detergents and sheaths The ultrasonographic image scanner uses ultrasound and it makes direct contact with the patient when in use Depending on the types of examinations such contact can be made to a wide variety of locations including the ordinary skin or the location of blood transfusion during a surgical procedure The most effective method to prevent infection among patients is to use each probe only once However probes may need to be reused as they are complex in design and expensive Accordingly use sheaths and other pro
29. 10 23 Doe Jane 23y0m C2 8 Gen Tis 0 2 09 35 32 AM G50115dB FA9 P90 Epididymi Free Fluid Font Size 11 Home Position Load TEXT Default Size Load Input Figure 6 2 Text Input Mode 66 Chapter 6 Image Management Entering and Deleting Text E Typing Text Usethe keyboard You can move the cursor by using the Trackball or the arrow keys on the keyboard E Deleting Text Press the Clear button on the control panel All the text entered on the screen will be deleted Text Input Mode Soft Menu The soft menu changes in text input mode E Font Size Select the font size to use Select a size from between 10 and 30 by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu E Default size The font resets to the default size 11 when the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu is pressed E Home Position Home position is the default cursor position in text input mode You can choose to Load or Set a Home Position by rotating the 2 dial button beneath the soft menu E Load Set Perform the function selected for Home Position by pressing the 2 dial button beneath the soft menu When Load is selected and the dial button 2 is pressed the cursor appears at default position When Set is selected and the dial button 2 is pressed a new default location for the cursor is set E Text Used to select the text that you wish to enter Select an option from Text 1 to 10 by rotating the 3 dial button beneath the
30. 20 Disks The volume is calculated by adding together the areas in the 20 parallel planes d 20 x A1 A2 A20 d the sum of the distances between disks NOTE 3 Distances A 1st Dia B 2nd Dia C 3rd Dia The factor value is set to 0 523 by default When the value needs to be changed a value between 0 and 1 0 factor lt 1 is recommended 7 78 Chapter 7 Utilities Predicted PSA correction factor Specify the predicted Prostate Specific Antigen PSA correction factor for the measurement of WG and T Zone volumes The default value is 0 12 Urology Measurement Result E Measurement Result Type Specify the measurement method Select Avg Last Max or Min value Number of Measure Results Displayed Number of Results Displayed Set the number of lines in which to display the urology measurement results on the screen 7 19 EE MySonoU6 Operation Manual Fetal Heart Select the Fetal Heart tab on the Measurement Setup screen Here you can set items related to fetal heart measurement Cursor amp Method Circ and Area Method Trace LV Volume Method Teichholz FH Measurement Result Measurement Result Type Avg Number of Measure Results Displayed Number of Results Displayed 16 CH Figure 7 48 Fetal Heart Setup Cursor amp Method E Circ And area method Specify how a circumference and area is measured in a 2D fetal cardiac image Either Ellipse or Trace can be selecte
31. 8 Color Map Color Map Select a color map type Use the Ext Menu dial button to set a value between 0 and 15 Tag Press the Ext Menu dial button to turn this function on or off When turned on the colors at a specific part tag of the image displayed on the screen can be changed to meet individual preferences Tag Pos Used to reposition the tag Use the Ext Menu dial button to set a value between 0 and 248 The Tag Pos affects the Tag Width Tag Width Used to specify the tag width Use the Ext Menu dial button to set a value from 8 through 256 The Tag Width affects the Tag Pos 7 14 Chapter 7 Utilities D Post Select D Post from the post curve menu Configuration options are the same as with 2D Post D Post Figure 7 9 D post M Post Select M Post from the post curve menu Configuration options are the same as with 2D Post Figure 7 10 M post 7 15 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual wi Preset This mode is used for system settings It does not affect image output The setup may be modified depending on specific needs or preferences 1 Select Setup from the utility menu 2 This displays the Setup screen Select a tab that has items to specify Selecting a tab You can select a desired tab in either one of two ways Select the method that suits you gt Rotate the Ext Menu dial button to select a tab P Use the trackball and the Set button to select a tab 3 Specify s
32. 9 EPISTOLAS 7 12 Table of Contents ILIUM ERR TET M A C RIDE lee ALC es cccssccssccoscccssccesccessssusscezsceuscsescsusscuzsceusscusscezsceusscuscsusscunsceosssusscuzsceuscvesssusscavsceuscsusscussceusstesssusssunsceusssoseeusseussctescsuss Peripherals c e User Defined Key Miscellaneous EEN Measurement EIDEN 7 56 EN CH e TE VE TEL Urology Fetal Heart Keele Sem 7 82 MERU M T 7 84 Chapter8 Maintenance Operatirig EDVIFORDTYell ee iecore etapa onc tete het ote N ho N 8 3 SY cMMIEUN Ino 8 4 Cleaning EI Ke le D 8 4 AECH Add 8 6 Battery Pack Management Replacing the Battery Pack certen Storing tlie Battery E Disposing of the Battery Pack MySonoU6 Operation Manual D ta eV Sn SUN e User Settings Backup Patient Information Backup NODI I Chapter9 Probes Probes oec ipee eret e Red dee etae die ence cel ede nente ee ee eee eee eec Rut 9 3 Ultrasound Transmission Gel rRNA ERREUR 9 8 Sheath cC 9 9 Probe Safety Precautions 9 10 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe ttti tttttttttttttt 9 12 BIOPSY e
33. Date under Patient Information gt Average USGA The GAis calculated using the average values of several ultrasound measurements gt GA View Select this check box to replace the current date with the GA in History E History The current and past measurements for a fetus are displayed in a concise format 5 97 SSI MySonoU6 Operation Manual History Click the Ultrasound Report screen s History button The past and present measurement values of the fetus are displayed in a table format You can change and review the percentile criteria Ultrasound Report OB Ee 199195 Comment Report Next App Figure 5 34 History Standard Deviation amp Percentile Among the OB information the Growth table and the typical fetal distribution for the same number of weeks are used to determine the following information gt The normal distribution curve P The measurements for an actual fetus or a position in EFW distribution P Whether a distribution point is within the normal range The reference number of weeks for the growth table can be set to LMP Estab DD or Average US GA under Pctl Criteria The typical setting is LMP When the LMP is not known or uncertain or when the difference between the LMP and the Average US GA is substantial care must be taken as selecting different Pctl Criteria can result in a significant difference The distribution of the number of weeks in the Growth table for the selected refe
34. Defined Key Measure Key Setup P For twins distinguish fetuses by specifying them as Fetus A and Fetus B in the Measurement menu To change between the fetuses for measurement press the Change button Set up the GA Equation GA Table and OB measurement menus that are used in obstetrics measurements The user can manually write back up or restore GA Tables For more information on the GA Equation and Table refer to the Reference Manual Refer to the Setting Measurements section in Chapter 7 Utilities for additional information 5 3 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Early OB Measurement Menu When the measurements for the selected items are complete the measurements and gestational age are displayed on the screen The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report General OB GS YS NT NB FL AC EFW gt Duct Venosus Fetal HR Figure 5 3 Early OB Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit GS All Distance cm mm YS All Distance cm mm CRL All Distance cm mm NT All Distance mm NB All Distance cm mm BPD All Distance cm mm FL All Distance cm mm AC All Circumference or automatic siii calculation EFW All Duct V All PW Velocity cm s m s Duct V S Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s Duct Venosus Duct V D Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s Duct V A Vmax PW Ve
35. Dist All Distance cm mm General Vol Flow Auto PW Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow D PW Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow TAMV PW Doppler spectrum trace cm s m s Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5 62 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations UE Artery Calculations Takes upper extremity artery measurements The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P Itis convenient to calculate each measurement value on the spectral doppler image P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 General Measurement Menu UE Artery ES Subclavian A gt Axillary A gt Brachial A gt Radial A gt Ulnar A gt SPA General gt Vol Flow HR Figure 5 14 General UE Artery Measurement Menu 5 63 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Method Unit Auto Trace Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace Doppler spectrum trace Subclabian A Manual Trace Doppler spectrum trace Axillary A PSV velocity cm s m s Brachial A Radial A EDV Velocity cm s m s Ulnar A gt SPA JoStA Area General StD Distance Vesl Area Area cm
36. Distance cm mm Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s General StA All Calculation after area measurement Calculation after distance StD All measurement Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm 5 4 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations The measurement methods for Transitional Zone Prostate Volume Bladder Volume Left Renal Volume Right Renal Volume are the same as for Prostate Volume E 3 Distance Factor The measurement method is identical to 3 Distance The volume is calculated by using the factor value Volume ml Factor x Distance1 x Distance2 X Distance3 E Ellipsoid Calculate a volume by using the Main Diameter and Beside Diameter values Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit WG Prostate Vol Calculation after distance T Zone Vol All All DEET ml Bladder Vol Calculation after distance Pre Vol All ml measurement Residual Vol Calculation after distance Post Vol All ml measurement All All Calculation after distance Rt Renal Vol measurement m Lt Renal Vol Renal Pelvis All Distance cm mm Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity c
37. EEEE Eese EAn 4 20 PW Spectral Doppler Mode A 4 23 CW Spectral Doppler Mode ee 4 29 SBS le 4 31 Uleies 4 33 E CombinedMode eee ene nesenen 4 35 el DEE et 4 35 PIDBIDDIPNINM OG 4 35 2D G GW Mode e eR ETE 4 35 2 BID GWIMOGdGeN ERE 4 35 2D G MIModem RE mee 4 36 ADUE UNEA REESE 4 36 ue Dual Mode d n EE AR AS 4 37 De e 5 cerent teer eeteeerenerore 4 38 3p Stab DY ace e es TREE RD EET 4 39 SltOVuewCNIE Ree 4 42 2 Information Types of Diagnosis Modes Basic Combined Dual and 3D 4D modes are available Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes E Basic Mode Consists of different modes each of which has a specific usage and function Includes 2D mode E Combined Mode Provides two or three Basic modes for a single image at the same time Includes 2D mode E Dual Mode Splits the screen into two allowing you to view two images at the same time Since each sub screen can display a different image it can be a very useful feature allowing multilateral views of an organ E 3D 4D Mode 3D and 4D images can be obtained The types of diagnosis mode that are available with the product are shown below Mode Type Basic Mode 2D Mode Color Doppler Mode Power Doppler Mode M Mode PW Spectral Doppler Mode CW Spectral Doppler Mode TDI Tissue Doppler Imaging Mode TDW Tissue Doppler Wave Mode Combined Mode 2D C PW Mode 2D PD PW Mode 2D C CW Mode 2D PD CW Mode 2D C M Mode 2D C Live Mode Dual Mode Dual M
38. Labreuche Jean Pierre Belliard Serge Cohen Serge Kownator Jean Jacques Portal Isabelle Pithois Merli Pierre Amarenco On behalf of PARC Study participating physicians E Risk Factor Mannheim Carotid Intima Media Thickness Consensus 2004 2006 P J Touboul M G Hennerici S Meairs H Adams P Amarenco N Borstein L Csiba M Desvarieux S Ebrahim M Fatar R Hermandez Hernandez M Jaff S Kownator P Prati T Rundek M Sitzer U Schiminke J C Tardif A Taylor E Vicaut K S Woo F Zannad M Zureik Normal IMT Simon A Gariepy J Chironi G Megnien JL Levenson J Intima media thickness a new tool for diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular risk Journal of Hypertension 20 159 169 2002 5 59 UG 2011 10 20 0001 FR 31Hz EET MI 0 92 2011 10 23 Doe Jane 23y0m Vascular LN5 12 Gen Tis 0 2 09 05 37 AM Correlation between the Framingham Risk Score and Intima Media Thickness Touboul et al Framingham Score 30 1 1 13 03 0 5 Mean IMT Estimating Risk of CHD Wilson PWF Circulation 1998 10 Yr Men Women 45 AT 24 27 Direction Left Position CCA ICA Analysis Figure 5 12 Analysis Saving Auto IMT Measurement Values 1 Select the direction of the measurement site by using the Direction button 2 Select the position of the measurement site by using the Position button 3 Select the name corresponding to the measurement site by using soft menu buttons 3 through 5 When you press the button
39. Measure Results Displayed Measurement Result Type Number of Results Displayed 16 CH Figure 7 46 Vascular Setup AJB Ratio Specify each individual peak velocity for which a ratio between A and B will be calculated ICA CCA Ratio Specify each individual measurement item that will be used for the ICA CCA ratio Doppler Results Set the Doppler measurement items that will be displayed with the measurement results Vascular Measurement Result E Measurement Result Type Specify the measurement method Select Avg Last Max or Min value 7 6 Number of Measure Results Displayed Number of Results Displayed Set the number of lines in which to display the measurement results Chapter 7 Utilities 7 17 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Urology Select the Urology tab on the Measure Setup screen You can specify settings for urology measurement Figure 7 47 Urology Setup Volume Method Specify an equation that will be used for volume calculation gt 3 Distances The volume is calculated by using three diameters in the longitudinal and transverse planes 4 3 x mx A 2 x B 2 x C 2 gt 3 Distances x Factor The volume is calculated by using three diameters in the longitudinal and transversal planes and a factor F value entered by the user A x B x C x Factor gt Ellipsoid The volume is calculated by using the length of the Main and Beside axes 4 3 x n x Main 2 x Beside 2 P Sum of
40. Mode 3 Distance This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes You can measure the volume of an object in a 2D image by using 3 straight lines 1 Press Caliper and select 3 Distance under soft menu 3 3 Distance is shown in the user information area 2 You can specify two points and measure the straight distance between them The measurement method is identical to Distance 3 Measure the length of the remaining two straight lines as in the above 4 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen The volume of the object and the length of the straight line are calculated P Pressing Undo on the touch screen while measurement is in progress cancels the previous measurement and restarts the current measurement The equations used for 3 Distance measurement are as follows D D D Volume 01 172 773 3 2 2 2 D distance 1 Distance This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes You can measure the volume of an object in a 2D image by using a single straight line 1 Press Caliper and select 1 Distance under soft menu 3 1 Distance is shown in the user information area 2 You can specify two points and measure the straight distance between them The measurement method is identical to Distance 5 18 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations 3 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen The volume of t
41. PSV Velocity cm s m s Kee EDV Velocity cm s m s 96StA Area 96 96StD Distance 96 Vesl Area Area cm mm Vesl Dist Distance cm mm Volume Flow Auto Automatic calculation ml m Volume Flow D Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow TAMV Doppler spectrum Trace cm s m s Vesl Dist Distance cm mm Vesl Area All Area cm mm HR M PW Heart Rate bpm Auto IMT Optional This function allows you to take IMT measurements easily and quickly NOTE P Auto IMT is only available under the following conditions Probe Linear Probe Application Vascular Diagnosis Mode 2D C or PD Mode 5 56 Measurements and Calculations Auto IMT Screen 2011 10 20 0001 FR 31Hz 3 5cm MI 0 92 2011 10 23 Doe Jane 23y0m Vascular LN5 12 Gen Tis 0 2 09 04 37 AM Points 88 0 Direction Left Position Distal CCA ICA Analysis Figure 5 11 Auto IMT Risk Color Bar The Risk Color Bar is shown in colors based on the IMT thickness If the thickness is lt 0 5 mm the entire bar is shown in green If the thickness is gt 1 1 mm the entire bar is shown in red For a thickness between these values the bar is shown in the corresponding color Ruler and Range Bar Use the trackball and Set button to specify the location and range at which IMT will be measured Ruler The grid unit is 10 mm This option is used when a vessel is lying laterally At the measurement location press the Set button to take IMT measureme
42. Pediatric X O Abdomen Vascular LN5 12 Musculoskeletal Small Parts Vascular P2 4 Abdomen Cardiac TCD EVN4 9 Gynecology OB Urology 3DC2 6 Abdomen Gynecology OB 3D4 9 Urology OB Gynecology CW2 0 Cardiac X XIX XJ O X X X X XIX OO KI X XxX XxX XxX Xx ze lz K o KL KL 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X O X X zz zl zl X zx O0OlOoO Oo o o o o ojojo x o o o o o o o G ste er fer fer fer far far M EM OOJ ec ec ec al X 5X X XIX zl XIX XIXI XJ OJ X X XxX X zl zl ze OXJ XJ XI XIX XxX XxX Kx K OJOJ OJ XxX X XxX zslzsl ze xI IoOJoOJoOIOIOJ OJ XJ XJ X X X K X X XxX XxX XxX ze 9 6 Chapter 9 Probes NOTE Legend Har Harmonic imaging TDI Tissue Doppler PI Pulse Inversion PD Power Doppler SCI Spatial Compound Imaging DPDI Directional Power Doppler Imaging Q Scan Quick Scan TDW Tissue Doppler Wave ECG Electro Cardio Graph Imaging CW Continuous Wave CM Color M Thermal Index TI Tables TI values displayed on the screen title bar can change depending on probes and applications The following thermal indices are available soft tissue Tls bone TIb and cranial bone Tic This product has been configured to display the appropriate thermal index based on the probe and application being used Refer to the following table
43. Press this button to turn on or off If it is turned on the contrast of a 3D image will be enhanced VCE is an acronym for Volume Contrast Enhancement NOTE VCE is only available with 2D 3D ROI 3D and Fixed 3D modes Available only with 2D 3D ROI 3D and Fixed 3D modes Auto Contour This feature automatically identifies fetus s fetal faces from sagittal scan images Press this button to turn on or off Once on a contour line is drawn within the A plane s ROI box and the 3D image is contoured N NOTE Supported only in ROI 3D mode where the Render Direction setting under Render Setup is set to C 449 MySonoU6 Operation Manual 3D Cine Press this button to bring up the 3D Cine Define screen 3D Cine Define Specify the settings needed for creation of a Cine image E Rotation Angle Used to specify the total image rotation angle Set to 30 45 60 90 180 or 360 by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu E Step Angle Used to specify the rotation angle per step Set to 1 3 5 or 15 by rotating the soft menus dial button 2 The Difference between Rotation Angle and Step Angle A Cine image rotates to the angle specified under Rotation Angle During this process each rotational step is equivalent to the angle specified under Step Angle For example if Rotation Angle is set to 360 and Step Angle is set to 15 a 3D Cine image rotates to 360 in 22 steps each of which involves a rotatio
44. Render Mode 2 Used to configure Render Mode 2 The options are the same as with Render Mode 1 E Render Direction Used to specify the rendering orientation indicates the facing direction and indicates the opposite of the facing direction E TH High Used to specify the maximum threshold range You can select an interval between 0 and 255 MagiCut MagiCut cuts out 3D image sections that serve no purpose in diagnosing the patient Press this button the bring up the MagiCut screen NOTE P Available in MPR mode only P Not supported in 4D mode P After MagiCut is enabled if the system is switched to a mode other than MPR Mode MagiCut is disabled 4 55 UG MI 0 46 2011 10 21 Tis 0 3 02 58 06 PM ka MagiCut Inside Contour 25 Transparency 100 Rotate X Rotate Y Rotate Z Figure 4 15 MagiCut CutMode Used to select a cut mode Inside Contour Cuts the inside of the selected area Outside Contour Cuts the outside of the selected area Inside Box Cuts the inside of the box Outside Box Cuts the outside of the box Small Eraser Cuts the selected contour line Big Eraser Cuts the selected contour line This uses a thicker contour line than Small Eraser 456 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes E Depth Used to specify the cut depth gt Full Cuts out the entire area gt Define Cuts out a user defined area Define an area as follows 1 Usethe trackball and the Set button to se
45. Report which reviewed available data on the possible effects of ultrasound exposure Another report Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound dated January 28 1993 provides more up to date information The acoustic output for this system has been measured and calculated in accordance with the December 1985 510 K Guide for Measuring and Reporting Acoustic Output of Diagnostic Ultrasound Medical Devices except for the hydrophone which meets the requirements of Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment NEMA UD 2 1992 The terms and symbols used in the acoustic output tables are defined in the following paragraphs ISPTA 3 Derated spatial peak temporal average intensity milliwatts per square centimeter ISPPA 3 The derated spatial peak pulse average intensity watts per square centimeter The value of IPA 3 at the position of global maximum MI IPA 3 MlI may be reported instead of ISPPA 3 if the global maximum MI is reported MI The Mechanical Index The value of MI at the position of ISPPA 3 MI ISPPA 3 may be reported instead of MI global maximum value if ISPPA 3 is 190W cm Pr 3 The derated peak rarefactional pressure megapascals associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the reported MI value WO The ultrasonic power milliwatts For operating conditions giving rise to ISPTA 3 WO is the total time average power For operating conditions subject to reporting under ISP
46. Rt Lt W All Distance cm mm Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Pericystic Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s Most of the gynecology measurements are distance measurements and volume measurements based on the distance measurement results If multiple images such as long axis images and transverse axis images are needed press the Freeze button to switch to Scan Mode and obtain images from another perspective 541 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Cardiac Calculations Ge NOTE Cardiac measurement is an optional item The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 E Dist 20 Traces the cardiac circumference and then draws the cardiac axis The system automatically draws 20 straight lines perpendicular to the axis and calculates cardiac volume NOTE gt In Dual 2D Mode two images can be viewed simultaneously gt For RVAWd RVIDd RVAWs and RVIDs see the LV measurement method gt MPA Diam RPA Diam and LPA Diam are measured under Aortic Valve Level in Parasternal Short Axis View P C Mode is mainly
47. Select from Slow Normal and Fast Slower speeds allow more precise measurements Export Image Compensation Set the post curve of the image to use the DICOM service Click the Compensation button to display the Compensation window Adjust Gamma Brightness and Contrast by using the slider for each option If Default is clicked the system default settings will be restored Compensation Adjusting the post curve settings for images allows other monitors to display them as closely as possible to the original images which is convenient in diagnosis Gamma Brightness Contrast Default Figure 7 21 Compensation 7 34 Chapter 7 Utilities Option Select the Option tab on the Setup screen Sets or releases the use of the optional software or hardware Options Option SW Serial No Manual Options Status Expire Date 4D Permanent 3D XI Permanent CW Function Permanent Cardiac Measurement Permanent DICOM Permanent Spatial Compound Permanent DynamicMR Permanent AutolMT Permanent HW Configuration ECG Install Change HDD Figure 7 22 Setup Options Actual options may vary Options The list of optional software will appear NOTE To purchase optional software please contact the software s distributor E Option This shows the types of optional software that can be installed on the product E Status This shows the current status of optional software gt Not Installed Hardware
48. Slice Next Page Figure 4 11 3D View MPR View Mode Menu Specify a viewing mode optimize the 3D image and then perform the diagnosis and take measurements A Plane Image of the axial section B Plane Image of the sagittal section Q C Plane Image of the coronal section Q 3D Image 442 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes Q Trackball status indication The current trackball state is displayed at the bottom of the monitor screen You can select Pointer Move or ROI for trackball Press the Change button on the control panel to change the trackball state The trackball state changes sequentially each time the button is pressed gt Cursor The trackball is used like a cursor in this state Use the trackball and the Set button to select on screen icons Pressing the Pointer button activates the cursor immediately gt Move You can move 3D images with the trackball The acquired 3D image moves as you move the trackball gt ROI You can resize the ROI box with the trackball The ROI box on the 3D image is resized as you move the trackball Available only with Display in the MPR tab set to ROI 3D E Zooming In Out Image Press the Zoom button on the control panel to zoom in to or out from images The current zoom factor appears on the bottom right part of the screen E Resizing ROI With the trackball in ROI state you can move the trackball to adjust the ROI boundaries With the trackball in cursor state position the
49. Trim Last Pos Pressing the soft menu s dial button 5 saves the selected position as the last frame E CINE Save Pressing the soft menu s dial button 6 saves the images from the defined range The saved image appears in the thumbnail list on the screen and can be reloaded or replayed in scan mode or SONOVIEW E Auto IMT Pressing the soft menu s dial button starts the measurement of Auto IMT For more information refer to Carotid Calculations in Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations NOTE P Auto IMT is an optional feature of this product P Auto IMT is available only under the following conditions Probe Linear Probe Application Vascular Diagnosis Mode 2D C or PD Mode Image Preview in Multi lmage Mode Only images in an active area can be reviewed To review images from another area change the active area by using the keyboard s Dual key Alternatively you can press the control panel s Pointer button position the cursor in the area you wish to activate and then press Set 65 U6 Annotation Text Allows the user to place text on an image This function can be useful when the diagnosis area is differentiated or displayed Starting Text Input Press the Text key on the keyboard This activates the text input mode SCH NOTE With quick text activated pressing any key on the keyboard immediately activates text input mode 2011 10 23 0001 FR 16Hz 15 0cm MI 0 81 2011
50. View or 3D XI Optimize the acquired images as needed for diagnosis Press the 3D 4D button to acquire 3D images again How to Improve 3D Image Quality Consider the direction size and section of the viewpoint as well as the visibility of an object Before acquiring 3D images adjust the contrast in 2D Mode The bigger the ROI box the slower the rendering speed Therefore set an appropriate ROI box size To see the 3D image of a fetus in frontal view position the fetal head in the direction of the Direction Mark putting it in the coronal plane Then scan the fetus from back to abdomen The 3D image of a fetal face can be more easily located in the coronal plane than in the Sagittal plane To determine surface contour subjects such as amniotic fluid that do not generate echoes should be insulated with hypo echoic textures Once 3D image acquisition is complete you can adjust the low threshold level to clean up the image The general rule is not to adjust High Threshold set it to the maximum value of 255 441 UG 3D View MPR This viewing mode is launched when an image is acquired from 3D standby with View Mode set to MPR Alternatively you can select the MPR tab from the view mode menu The Basics of 3D View Mode Screen Layout 8 0cm MI 0 46 2011 10 21 Tis 0 3 02 54 11 PM Middle 70 Off 25 Transparency 100 Rotate X Rotate Y Rotate Z UID Flip Gain to Ref
51. WARNING P Ultrasound waves may have damaging effects on cells and therefore may be harmful to the patient If there is no medical benefit minimize the exposure time and maintain the ultrasound wave output level at low Please refer to the ALARA principle P Do not use the system if an error message appears on the video display indicating that a hazardous condition exists Note the error code turn off the power to the system and call the Samsung Medison service department in your area P Do not use a system that exhibits erratic or inconsistent updating Discontinuities in the scanning sequence are indication of a hardware failure that should be corrected before use P The system limits the maximum contact temperature to 43 degree Celsius and the ultrasonic waves output observes American FDA regulations ALARA Principle Performing diagnoses using an ultrasound device is defined by the As Low As Reasonably Achievable ALARA principle The decision as to what is reasonable should be left to the judgment and insight of qualified personnel No set of rules can be formulated that would be sufficiently complete to dictate the correct response for every circumstance By keeping ultrasound exposure as low as possible while obtaining diagnostic images users can minimize ultrasonic bioeffects Since the threshold for diagnostic ultrasound bioeffects is undetermined it is the sonographer s responsibility to control the total en
52. and Set button to select a view mode menu tab In 4D mode however the menu tab can only be changed while in the freeze state E Measurements by Application NOTE P Measurements can be taken only for images in MPR MSV or 4D Mode gt Only the Sonoview Patient and Report buttons are available during measurement Press the Calculator button on the control panel Measurement taking methods are identical to those described in Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations E Basic Measurement Press the Caliper button on the control panel For more information refer to Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations and specifically the Basic Measurement section E Entering Text Press the keyboard s Text button With quick text activated pressing any key on the keyboard immediately activates text input mode For more information refer to Chapter 6 Image Management and specifically the Entering Text section 444 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes m B Entering Indicators Press the keyboard s Indicator button For more information referto Chapter 6 Image Management and specifically the Entering Indicators section E Saving Images N NOTE If volume data contains both 4D and 3D Cine images choose either 4D or 3D for saving 1 Press the Save button on the control panel This brings up the 3D Data Save window 2 Specify settings such as Save Type Save Item and Volume Format 3 To save using the specified settings c
53. and search scroll bar appear at the bottom of the image You can play pause stop or search forward backward with the scroll bar ID 2011 08 04 0001 U6 Name Doe Jane 1 selected C4 9 1 OED Abdomen FPS71D 7 0cmiGen MIO 63 T1s0 4 2011 08 04 07 17 36 PM G50 108dB FA8 P90 Close All Close 1 Layout Image Scroll Thumb Scroll Figure 6 9 Cine Scroll Bar 6 23 MySonoU6 Operation Manual N NOTE CINE images can only be played in the 2 x 2 or less layout Searching Exam 1 Click the Exam Search ES icon on the screen The Exam List screen will appear 2 Select an exam and click Review to bring up the SONOVIEW window and view the selected exam Distance Click the Distance Caliper icon Ezd on the screen You can measure the distance between two points on an image Measurement results are not saved 1 Place the cursor over an image and press the Set button The image will be resized to its original size 2 Measure the desired distance Measurement methods are identical to those described in Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations 3 Clickthe icon once more to finish Measurement of Circumference and Area Click the Ellipse Caliper icon d on the screen You can measure the circumference and area of the desired area in an image Measurement results are not saved 1 Place the cursor over an image and press the Set button The image will be resized to its original size 2 Measure the circumf
54. biopsy kit must be conducted by medical doctors or experienced medical staff with appropriate qualifications Always without fail verify all safety procedures and disinfection Other brands of biopsy kit may not properly fit Samsung Medison probes Use only Samsung Medison approved biopsy kits Improper installation may result in patient discomfort Inspect all components Ensure that the biopsy kit you are using is the correct one for the probe the system and the system software WARNING P Do not attempt to use the biopsy until you read the instructions for installing the sheath and verifying alignment of the needle guide P Always ensure that the probe and the needle guide are secured on both the left and the right P Do not use in IVF CVS or PUBS procedures Biopsy Procedure The system generates a needle guideline through the displayed real time ultrasound images to indicate the anticipated path of the needle You can use this guideline to ensure that the needle or instrument is following the correct path 1 Ready the patient according to the procedure appropriate for the examination objectives 2 Install the sheath and the biopsy kit 3 Set the system controls for the biopsy procedure If necessary apply acoustic gel to the patient 4 Scan the patient Adjust the patient so that the location for examination fits into the needle guideline on the screen 921 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual 5 Install the needl
55. blood flow information is displayed in Color Doppler Mode Use the Change button to move and resize the ROI box Whenever the Change button is pressed the current ROI box status appears at the bottom left of the screen gt ROI Position In this state the position of the ROI box can be changed You can move the ROI box by using the trackball gt ROI size In this state the size of the ROI box can be changed Press the Change button to designate the size C Mode Soft Menu A The soft menu in C mode consists of the following NOTE The soft menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility gt Menu Edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 Steer Frame Avg Color Map Sensitivity Balance Scale Color Invert Harmonic M Line Write Zoom 2D C Live Color Format Color Mode Line Density Baseline Power Frequency Filter TDI B Steer Loss of color information resulting from ultrasound beam angle adjustment is minimized Rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 and set ROI to Left None or Right N NOTE The Steer function is only available when using a linear probe 4 17 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Color Invert Pressing the soft menu s dial button 1 inverts the color bar Inverting the color bar also inverts the color displayed on the image E Color Map Used to configure the post curve in a color image Choose from Type 1 through 14 by rotating the
56. cm s m s LA Diam 2D All Distance cm mm MV Diam 1 All Distance cm mm cinta MV E DT A PW Continuous measurement MV Dect MR Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s MR dp dt PW Calculation after Time Measurement mmHg s LVOT Diam All Distance cm mm Ao Sinus Diam All Distance cm mm Ao Diam 2D All Distance cm mm Ao ST Junct Diam All Distance cm mm Asc Ao Diam All Distance cm mm bm Ao Arch Diam All Distance cm mm Ao Isth Diam All Distance cm mm Desc Ao Diam All Distance cm mm AV Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s AR DecT PW Time ms AR ed Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s AR PHT PW PHT ms 5 53 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit S D PW Continuous measurement S Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s Miete D Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s A Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s A Dur PW Time ms Systemic VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm Pulmonic VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm LVOT Diam All Distance cm mm RVOT Diam All Distance cm mm SVC S D PW Continuous measurement SVC S Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s SVC D Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s Qp Os SVC A Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s SVC A Dur PW Time ms IVC S D PW Continuous measurement IVC S Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s IVC D Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s IVC A Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s IVC A Dur PW Time ms RA Major All Distance cm mm TV Diam 1 All Distance cm mm Rt Inflow TR Vmax PW Velocity
57. disperses the energy over a wide area and the beam is only concentrated on a given area for a fraction of the time necessary in unscanned mode Pulse repetition frequency or rate refers to the number of ultrasound bursts of energy over a specific period of time The higher the pulse repetition frequency the more pulses of energy in a given period of time Several controls affect pulse repetition frequency focal depth display depth sample volume depth color sensitivity number of focal zones and sector width controls Focus of the ultrasound beam affects the image resolution Maintaining or increasing the resolution at a different focal zone involves the adjustment of numerous outputs from the focal zone This output adjustment is one of the system s optimization features Different exams require different focal depths Setting the focus to the proper depth improves the resolution of the structure of interest Pulse length is the time during which the ultrasonic burst is turned on The longer the pulse the greater the time average intensity value The greater the time average intensity the greater the likelihood of temperature increase and cavitations Pulse length burst length and pulse duration refer to the output pulse duration in pulsed Doppler mode Increasing the Doppler sample volume increases the pulse length Probe selection affects intensity indirectly Tissue attenuation changes with frequency The higher the probe operating freque
58. holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard 2 Select an image or report to send You can select images under Storage Image and reports under Storage SR 3 Click Transfer The transfer will be started and its progress will be displayed Click Close to cancel Click Test to check the DICOM s connection with the server Storage Image Alias Storage SR Alias Transfer Figure 3 15 DICOM Storage 326 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Printing Exams via DICOM NOTE Before using this feature make sure that DICOM is properly configured For instructions on configuring DICOM refer to Chapter 7 Utilities Transfer Figure 3 16 DICOM Printer Perform the following steps to print the selected exam via DICOM 1 After selecting an exam click Print on the screen The DICOM Printer window will be displayed Tips gt To select more than one image press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard 2 Click Transfer The transfer will be started and its progress will be displayed Click Close to cancel Click Test to check the DICOM s connection with the server Exporting the Exam Perform the following steps to export the selected exam to an external storage device a NOTE The system only supports USB storage devices 1 After selecting an exam click Export on the screen The Image Export window will be displayed Tips gt To select more than one image press the Set
59. measurement area gt Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button 3 Trace the curve so that the measurement cursor returns to the start point and then press the Set button NOTE Trace lines must be closed If you press the Set button before tracing is complete tracing may be done over a straight line between the current point and the start point resulting in a significant error 4 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen The equations used for Trace measurement are as follows Circ sum 4 X n Xia UE v n Y n 1 212 last poino Area sum X n DxYG0 XG0xY n D 12 last point StA StA stands for Stenosis Area which is a basic measurement available in all diagnosis modes In a 2D image the area of a vessel is measured to calculate the stenosis ratio 1 Press Caliper and select StA under soft menu 2 96StA is shown in the user information area 2 Measure the area of the vessel outer wall using the Area measurement method 3 When the second cursor appears measure the area of the vessels inner wall under stenosis 4 Calculate StA with the following equation StA Outer Area Inner Area Outer Area x 100 5 17 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual Volume Measurement NOTE Since Dual Mode simultaneously displays two images on the screen you don t have to return to the diagnosis mode to measure volume in Dual
60. of the system Press the dial button or rotate it to change the option Using Soft Menu dial buttons The soft menu consists of a top menu at the top of the screen and a sub menu at the bottom of the screen gt Top Menu Rotate the dial button to select an option P Sub Menu Press the dial button to select the option Frame Avg 9 Dynamic Range 120 Reject Level 9 EdgeEnhance 0 Focus Frequenc Harmonic M Line Off Write Zoom 2DIC Live Figure 2 4 Soft Menu Soft Menu Dial Buttons 4 through 6 Soft menu dial buttons 4 through 6 perform the following in 3D view P Soft Menu Dial Button 4 Rotates the image in the direction of the X axis P Soft Menu Dial Button 5 Rotates the image in the direction of the Y axis P Soft Menu Dial Button 6 Rotates the image in the direction of the Z axis E Keyboard The keyboard lets the user input text and use function keys to execute various functions directly C39 X ei T oom AED ero x n om el aerch m SUE SR esp ener See EE REES RRE La Me MNT EE JE DL i Me To D a C EI EE Figure 2 5 Keyboard 2 12 Chapter 2 Introduction This button is used to perform special functions that you have preset The ESC User function of this button can be set in Utility Setup User Defined Key User Key Setup F1 Dis
61. on an external storage device SCH NOTE The system only supports USB storage devices only 1 Connect the storage device that you want to use to back up the data 2 Select exam s and then click Backup on the screen Tips gt To select more than one image press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard 3 A Confirmation window will appear asking whether to continue the back up Click Yes to continue Click No to cancel 4 The Back up window will appear Under Drive select the media where the selected exams will be saved 5 Click OK to start the backup Click Cancel to cancel Backup Figure 3 18 Exam Back up 3 29 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Changing Measurements In the Patient Information screen press the Measure Data tab Under the Measure Data tab you can enter obstetrics measurements for a patient or check the existing measurements NOTE P Appears only when a patient ID has been selected P If obstetrics data has been changed by using New Pregnancy in Patient Information gt Study Information OB enter LMP as a piece of obstetrics data before changing measurement data Insert Screen Click Insert gt gt on the screen to display the Insert screen You can enter the existing obstetrical measurements E Exam Date Enter the measurement date NOTE If OB data has been changed by using New Pregnancy you can only enter a date between the newly entered LMP and yes
62. s m s 5 80 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Breast Measurement Menu Breast Mass1 Mass2 Mass3 gt Mass4 Mass5 Mass6 Mass au gt Breast Flow Figure 5 23 General Breast Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All All Calculation after distance ssi measurement Mass1 8 L All Distance cm mm D All Distance cm mm W All Distance cm mm Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s Breast Fow StA All Calculation after area measurement o5StD Al Calculation after distance measurement Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm Vel A PW Velocity cm s m s Vel B PW Velocity cm s m s 5 81 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Testicle Measurement Menu Testicle Mass1 Mass2 Mass3 aur Mass5 gt Testis Vol gt Testis Flow Figure 5 24 General Testicle easurement Menu Measurement Menul Method Unit Calculation after distance Ps measurement Mass 1 5 L Distance cm mm Testis Vol H Distance cm mm Ww Distance cm mm Auto Trace Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace Doppler spectrum trace Manual Trace Doppler spectrum trace PSV Velocity cm s m s EDV
63. screen AutoCalc is a Spectral Doppler mode feature that automatically performs specific calculations based on measured values NOTE The specified items will appear on the screen only when the AutoCalc button on the soft menu is pressed in Spectral Doppler Mode Peak Systolic Velocity End Diastolic Velocity Time Averaged Peak Velocity Resistive Index Pulsatility Index Systole Diastole Ratio Time Averaged Mean Velocity Diastole Systole Ratio Max Pressure Gradient Mean Pressure Gradient Velocity Time Integral PeakA AutoCalc Settings AutoCalc Setting Figure 7 32 Setup AutoCalc Add and remove automatic calculations by using the check boxes You can select up to six values When the Peak Systolic Velocity and End Diastolic Velocity values are 0 not all the results are displayed on the screen In addition the result value for Time Averaged Mean Velocity is displayed only when Mean Trace is turned on 7 54 Chapter 7 Utilities About Select the Abouttab in the Setup screen Information about the system software version will be displayed Click Detail to view more detailed information on the product version Click View to display license information Version Information Detail Version 1 00 00 0711 License Information Figure 7 33 Setup Information The S W version shown above can be different from the actual system version 7 55 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual es Measurement Sett
64. should be performed along the axis of the ultrasound beam in order to obtain accurate values gt Gain has a direct impact on resolution Gain can be adjusted by using the Gain button for each mode gt In general increasing the frequency of ultrasound enhances resolution Pixel Size gt Ultrasound images in the product consist of pixels gt Since a single pixel represents the basic unit of an image you should allow for a margin of error of 1 pixel between the original image size and the measurement result gt However this error becomes significant only when a narrow area in an image is measured 53 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Ultrasound Velocity gt The velocity of ultrasound used during measurement is usually 1 540 m s on average gt The velocity of ultrasound may vary depending on the cell type gt The possible range of error is approximately 2 596 depending on the structure of cells about 2 for typical cells and about 596 for fatty cells Doppler Signal Adjustment gt During velocity measurement an error may occur depending on the cosine angle between the blood flow and the ultrasound beam gt For Doppler velocity measurements the most accurate results can be ensured when the ultrasound beam is aligned in parallel with the blood flow gt If that is not possible the angle between them should be adjusted by using the Angle option Aliasing gt PW Spectral Doppler Mode uses a signal
65. the GA table and Growth table 3 Select a reference from the list on the right B Fetal Weight This setting is intended for the measurement of the estimated fetal weight EFW Select items in the following order P Select the EFW measurement method from EFW equation and EFW growth P Select a reference from the list 7 69 MySonoUG Operation Manual E Add a Reference NOTE Observe the following directions when adding a table reference If these conditions are not met a warning message appears and the reference is not saved P Input at least three types of data P If there are no Min and Max values select Value Only for Table Type 1 Press Fi The User Reference window will appear 2 Enter a name and description for a new reference 3 Specify the reference type as Table or Equation NOTE EFW Equation can only set Equation and EFW Growth can only set Table as the reference type 4 Click OK to go to the next step The Editor screen will appear Click Cancel to cancel 5 Enter a reference 6 Click Save to save the information Click Cancel to cancel 7 Click OK to finish Click Cancel to cancel Name Description Reference Type Table Equation Figure 7 41 User Reference 7 0 Chapter 7 Utilities Add Reference Table Clicking the Question Mark button shows the sources of the references Clicking the question mark button a second time hides the sources again Editor LU GS Han
66. the device s operation manual gt gt 2 16 Chapter 2 Introduction The following products are recommended E DVD Multi DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW CD R CD RW E USB Video Printer gt Color Mitsubishi CP30DW SONY UP D23MD SONY UP D25MD gt Black and White Mitsubishi P93DW Mitsubishi P95DE SONY UP D897 CAUTION gt You must install a Microsoft Windows XP or above compatible printer and driver Contact Samsung Medison s customer service department for inquiries about printer driver installation P When connecting a printer ensure that the printer is configured under Microsoft Windows or system setup and has been selected as the default printer E USB to Serial RS 232C Converter USB to Serial Converter RS 232C with FTDI Chipset FTDI FT232BM Compatible E Foot Switch To configure the foot switch function go to Utility gt Setup gt User Defined Key gt Foot Switch Select from Freeze Update Print 1 Print 2 Save Store Clip and Volume Start E Other Flash Memory media NOTE P The system cannot recognize USB 1 1 flash memory Remove the flash memory from the console and equip again with an appropriate device P To remove a USB storage device from the system go to Utility gt Storage Manager P Regarding file formats that are not ordinarily saved Please check first to see if it is possible to save the file format on a desktop PC before trying to save the file onto flash
67. the measurement values are saved and the Auto IMT measurement mode finishes The details are displayed on the left side of the screen 5 60 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations LE Artery Calculations Takes lower extremity artery measurements The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P Itis convenient to calculate each measurement value on the spectral doppler image P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 General Measurement Menu CIA gt IA gt EIA gt CFA gt SFA gt DFA gt Popliteal A gt ATA Wat gt Peroneal A gt DPA gt MPA gt LPA Metatarsal A gt Digital A gt General gt Vol Flow HR Figure 5 13 General LE Artery Measurement Menu 5 61 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit CIA Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace IIA EIA Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace CFA Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace SFA DFA PSV PW Velocity cm s m s Popliteal A ATA EDV PW Velocity cm s m s PTA 96StA All Area 96 Peroneal A DPA StD All Distance MPA Vesl Area All Area cm mm LPA Metatarsal A Digital A Vesl
68. using the soft menus dial button 5 E Gradient Mask Used to adjust the brightness level at a specific area of a slice image Select Top Bottom Left or Right Brightness level at the selected area is increased SH NOTE For more information on Preset and Palette refer to the 3D View MPR section Oblique View After drawing a straight or curved line in the selected image in MSV Mode you can observe the related oblique image Press the Oblique View tab from the view mode menu to bring up the Oblique View screen Direction of View of Oblique Image The observer is located perpendicular to the section of a reference image Please see the view direction below View Direction Start point 4 62 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes E Oblique View Screen The reference image that is selected in MSV Mode is displayed on the screen The reference image is highlighted with yellow borders and always placed in the upper left corner of the screen When more than one line is used for observation each line is indicated by a different color and number N NOTE While Calculator and Caliper are not available Text and Indicator are Oblique View Mode Soft Menu E Selected Slice Use the 1 dial button on the soft menu to select a line Available only if Multi Line or Multi Contour has been selected from the oblique view mode menu E Rotate Line Use the soft menu s dial button 2 to rotate the line that was selected in Selec
69. 0950 EN60950 for data processing equipment IEC60601 1 EN60601 1 for medical devices Furthermore all configurations shall comply with the requirements for medical electrical systems see IEC60601 1 1 EN60601 1 1 Anybody connecting additional equipment to signal input and output port of medical electrical equipment should make sure that the equipment complies with IEC60601 1 1 EN60601 1 1 MySonoU6 Operation Manual ECG Related Information WARNING P This device is not intended to provide a ECG monitoring function Therefore it does not have a means of indicating an inoperative electrocardiograph P Do not use the ECG electrodes for HF surgical equipment Any malfunctions in the HF surgical equipment may result in burns to the patient P Do not use ECG electrodes during cardiac pacemaker procedures or any procedures that involve other types of electrical stimulators P Do not use ECG leads and electrodes in an operating room ESD Electrostatic discharge ESD which is commonly referred to as static shock is a naturally occurring phenomenon ESD is most prevalent during conditions of low humidity including during heater or air conditioner use The static shock or ESD is a discharge of the electrical energy build up from a charged individual to a lesser or non charged individual or object An ESD occurs when an individual with an electrical energy build up comes in contact with conductive objects such as metal doorknobs f
70. 1 MySonoU6 Operation Manual TDI Mode Soft Menu A Soft menu in TDI mode consists of the following NOTE The soft menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility gt Menu Edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 Frame Avg Color Map Sensitivity Balance Scale Color Invert Harmonic M Line Write Zoom 2D C Live Color Format Line Density BaseLine Power Frequency Filter TDI Ge NOTE For more information on the soft menu refer to the Color Doppler Model section 4 32 Diagnosis Modes TDW Mode TDW stands for Tissue Doppler Wave TDW mode represents the movements of tissues such as the heart TDW Mode is available in the PW Spectral Doppler Mode If it is used in Spectral Doppler Mode along with Color Doppler mode changes in cardiac tissues over time can be observed SCH NOTE This can be used only when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe 16 0cm MI 0 94 Cardiac Res Tis 0 9 G50 118dB FA0 P90 G50 F1 5 00 kKHz 2 00 116 00 mm 0 Frame Avg 0 Dynamic Range 118 Reject Level 14 Edge Enhance 1 Frequency Harmonic Write Zoom 2DiC Live Figure 4 8 TDW mode Starting and Ending TDW Mode TDW Mode can be activated while in PW Spectral Doppler mode by pressing the soft menus dial button 6 Pressing the button once more switches the mode from TDW to PW Spectral Doppler 4 33 MySonoU6 Operation Manual TDW Mode Soft Menu A The soft m
71. 17 Autotext Edit E Clear Annotation Check this checkbox to delete the entered annotation when you change the mode 7 28 Chapter 7 Utilities Peripherals Select the Peripherals tab on the Setup screen You can configure keys buttons and the peripheral devices connected to the product Print Setup E Printer Orientation N NOTE This option is available only for an Echo printer that uses roll paper Set the type and page orientation of the Echo printer gt Printer Settings Select the printer to use by using the combo button gt Portrait When printed the long side of the page is vertical gt Landscape When printed the long side of the page is horizontal E Print Key Used to assign printers to the control panel s Print 1 and Print 2 buttons E Measure Report print Select the relevant check box to print the measurement report in an A4 Letter format E Local Printing Area Set the area that will be printed gt Full Screen 1024 768 Print the full monitor screen 1024 768 P Image Only Prints the image area only E Printing Image Adjustment Used to adjust the image print quality Select the image type and adjust Gamma Brightness and Contrast 7 29 MySonoU6 Operation Manual NOTE This is only supported by some digital printers Print Setup Printer Orientation Local Printing Area Full Screen 1024 x 768 Portrait Image Only Landscape Printing Image Adjustment a Reset
72. 2 All Distance cm mm MVA Planimetry All Area cm mm MV Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace MV E DT A PW Time Speed Time Measurement ms and m s MV E A PW Velocity cm s m s MV Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s MV PHT PW Time ms MV MV AccT PW Time ms MV DecT PW Time ms MV A Dur PW Time ms MV ET PW Time ms R R Int M PW Heart Rate bpm MRVCW PW Distance cm mm MR PISA Rad PISA Radius cm mm MR Alias Vel Velocity cm s m s MR Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace MR Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s MR VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm RVOT Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace avor RVOT Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s RVOT VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm RVOT Diam All Distance cm mm 5 47 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit PV Ann Diam All Distance cm mm PVA Planimetry All Area cm mm PV Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace PV Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s PV PHT PW Time ms PV VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm PV AccT PW Time ms PV ET PW Time ms PV DecT PW Time ms R R Int M PW Heart Rate bpm ty PRVCW PW Distance cm mm PR PISA Rad PISA Radius cm mm PR Alias Vel Velocity cm s m s PR Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace PR Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s MPA Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s PR PHT PW Time ms PRVTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm PR AccT PW Time ms PR DecT PW Time ms 5448 Cha
73. 31 MySonoU6 Operation Manual H E Save The Save To Excel window appears allowing you to save information on the screen in an Excel file By default the Excel file name is set to the measurement ID After specifying the target path and file name click Save to save the information Click Close to cancel N NOTE Checking the HTML checkbox saves information as an HTML file instead of an Excel file E Insert Switch to the nsert screen Insert gt gt Package All Refresh Save DATE TIME Exam Date Pkg Group Item Value Unit Fetus 2011 07 25 03 59 00 pm 2011 07 25 Ier Fetal Biometry YS 7 2420 cm A Figure 3 20 Measure Data View 332 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis vi Power Saving Mode This mode reduces power consumption when the cover is closed E Conversion to Power Saving Mode Once the cover is closed power saving mode is automatically activated gt Power saving mode automatically enables Freeze mode gt The backlight of the monitor and the control panel is turned off E Disabling Power Saving Mode Once the cover is opened the previous state is restored immediately gt The backlight of the monitor and the control panel is turned on Diagnosis Modes Iul Information acoeeeseseee ttem 4 3 Types of Diagnosis Modes es 4 3 Besk peram sonona 4 4 In Basic MOGB eon CDD IRR RN NR 4 6 2DIMOde m RETREAT 4 6 laf 4 13 ele le Ee RS 4 16 BowenlPonplenModeeeee setea eE er ee
74. 7 82 ER 7 84 Chapter 7 Utilities e gt Utilities Press the Utility key on the keyboard The Utility Menu and its associated soft menus appear on the screen With these menus you can configure the system and use the Biopsy and Histogram functions Utility Menu Use the utility menu s Ext Menu dial button to select the desired option utility Figure 7 1 Utility Menu Utility Soft Menu Used to change the application or preset Applications Abd Presets Genet User sets Jefaul App Load Pre Load Figure 7 2 Utility Soft Menu E Applications A list of applications supported for the current probe is displayed Rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 to select the application that you wish to change E App Load Press the soft menu s dial button 1 to load the selected application E Presets Displays the supported presets for the current application Select a preset by rotating the 2 dial button beneath the soft menu Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Usersets Displays the supported usersets for the current application Rotate dial button 3 to select a userset E Pre Load Pressing the soft menu s dial button 3 applies the selected userset to the system B Save Appears on the menu only when the selected userset is not a default userset Press the soft menu s dial button 4 to save the current settings E Rename Pressing the soft menu s dial button 5 brings up the Name window wh
75. 998 5 Second Edition of the AIUM Output Display Standard Brochure Dated March 10 1994 A copy of this document is shipped with each system 1 26 Chapter 1 Safety 6 Information for Manufacturer Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound Systems and Transducers FDA September 1997 FDA 7 Standard for Real Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment Revision 1 AIUM NEMA 1998 8 WFUMB Symposium on Safety of Ultrasound in Medicine Conclusions and Recommendations on Thermal and Non Thermal Mechanisms for Biological Effects of Ultrasound Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology 1998 Vol 24 Supplement1 n Situ Derated and Water Value Intensities All intensity parameters are measured in water Since water does not absorb acoustic energy these water measurements represent a worst case value Biological tissue does not absorb acoustic energy The true value of the intensity at any point depends on the amount and type of tissue and the frequency of the ultrasound that passes through the tissue The intensity value in the tissue and the In Situ value have been estimated by using the following formula In Situ Water e 023 aff where In Situ In Situ Intensity Value Water Water Value Intensity e 2 7183 a Attenuation Factor Tissue a dB cm MHz Brain 53 Heart 66 Kidney 79 Liver A3 Muscle 55 skin line to measurement depth cm f
76. Any MIC Unshielded Any Printer Remote Unshielded Any Audio R L Shielded Normal E Probes Probes listed in Chapter 9 Probes meet the Group 1 Class B requirements of the CISPR 11 standard E Approved Accessories for Electromagnetic Compliance Accessories used with this product may affect its emissions electromagnetic compatibility between this device and the accessory Use only CISPR 11 or CISPR 22 CLASS B compliant devices CAUTION P Before connecting this medical device to one of your own accessories you must ensure WARNING The use of cables transducers and accessories other than those specified may result in increased emission or decreased Immunity of the Ultrasound System 1 10 Immunity test IEC 60601 Test level Compliance level Chapter 1 Safety Electromagnetic environment guidance Electrotatic 6KV Contact 6KV Contact Floors should be wood discharge ESD concrete or ceramic tile 8KV air 8KV air If floors are covered with IEC 61000 4 2 synthetic material the relat ive humidity should be at least 30 Electrical fast 2KV 2KV Mains power quality transient burst for power supply lines 1KV for power supply lines 1KV should be that of a typical commer cial or hospital IEC 61000 4 4 for input output lines for input output lines environment Surge 1KV differential mode 1KV differential mode Mains power quality should be that of a typical IEC 61000 4 5 2KV c
77. D C Live DMR Rotation Frame Rate Line Density Power SRF Index L R Flip U D Flip Trapezoidal Pulse Inversion Tissue SRF E Frame Avg When an image is updated the present image and the previous image are averaged Set Frame Avg to between 0 and 15 by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu When you scan the same diagnosis site repeatedly speckles may appear on the updated image Frame Avg is used to minimize these speckles E Frequency Used to change the probe s frequency Select from Res Pen and Gen by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu gt Res Resolution High frequency gt Gen General General frequency gt Pen Penetration Low frequency The selected frequency is displayed in the title area allowing you to determine the state of the current frequency easily E Dynamic Range Adjust the image contrast by changing the minimum and maximum values ofthe input signal Turn the soft menus dial button 2 and select a value between 50 and 200 If you increase the range the image will become smoother 47 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Harmonic Pressing the soft menu s dial button 2 adds the HAR mark to the image information This product provides the OHI Optimal Harmonic Imaging function that optimizes an image with high frequencies SCH NOTE Harmonic is only available with specific probes E Reject Level Clears up the image by eliminating noise and echo Set to between 1 and 32 b
78. Defaults Print Key Print Print1 Sony UP D897 s am JE Gamma Print2 Sony UP D897 Brightness Measure Report Print Contrast Select for using Ad Letter Template Print1 Print2 Figure 7 18 Setup Peripherals 7 30 Chapter 7 Utilities User Defined Key Select the User Defined Key tab on the Setup screen You can set the functions of the keys and buttons on the product Set Exit Key Setup E Set Exit Key Switch Set the functions of the buttons to the left and right of the trackball on the control panel gt Exit Set The left button is set to Exit and the right button is set to Set gt Set Exit The left button is set to Set and the right button is set to Exit Foot Switch Set the functions ofthe left and right pedals of the foot switch The functions that can be set are shown below Freeze Update Print1 Print2 Save Store Clip and Volume Start User Key Setup E User Key Used to assign a function to the keyboard s User button The functions that can be set are shown below None Update EFW Measure EFW Result BPD HC AC FL APTD TTD FTA GS CRL TDI Probe Change Application Change Simultaneous 2D C Live Biopsy and Change Window Measure Key Setup E Measure Key Setup Used to assign a measurement task to the keyboard s function key The functions that can be set are shown below HC AC FL APTD TTD FTA GS CRL and BPD 7 31 732 MySonoU6 Operation Manual
79. Deleting DICOM Services Select a service and click Delete on the screen You will be prompted with a confirmation message Click OK to delete the selected service Click Cancel to cancel Testing DICOM Servers Select a service and click Test on the screen The connection with the selected service is tested and the results are shown under the Ping and Verify items If the result is Normal it indicates that the connection is functioning as it should do 7 49 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Managing DICOM Click Queue on the screen to switch to the DICOM Job Status screen You can review the current job status using the Job ID Patient ID etc The following describes the elements of the DICOM Job Status screen Network Status DisConnected Number of Jobs 0 Job Job ID Patient ID Alias Type Instances Date Time Status e d Gr Vd Retry All Delete Figure 7 30 DICOM Job Status Job ID Displays the job ID Patient ID Displays the patient ID Alias Displays the alias set in the DICOM Configuration screen oo 8 e Type Displays the job type The available job types are Storage Print Storage SR MPPS Start MPPS End and Storage CMT Instances Displays the number of instances What this denotes differs depending on the job type For Storage and Print it means the number of images For Storage SR it means the amount of measurement data For MPPS Start it is always displayed as 0 Date Time Displays t
80. Dist D Trace V11V2 D Velocity Figure 7 38 General Caliper Volume 1 Distance Dist Vol Ellipse Long Short Area Vol MOD Dist Area Vol Distance Ellipse Dist Long Short Area Vol 3 Distance Dist Vol 7 65 MySonoU6 Operation Manual OB Select the OB tab from the Measure Setup screen and then configure OB measurement related settings General Select the sub tab General under the OB tab You can specify basic OB measurement options Percentile Information OB Doppler Results Show Percentile Information Percentile Criteria Rank information Method E GA by LMP Standard Deviation TAPV Estab Due Date TAMY PGmax AUA jar Graph PGmean Fetal Weight Unit SiD DIS PI Gram g Pound Ib Ib oz m RI oz Clear Function on UnFreeze Clear Measure 2D Mode Result On UnFreeze Clear Measure M D Mode Result On UnFreeze Number of Measure Results Displayed OB Measurement Result Number of Results Displayed 16 Measurement Result Type Avg Figure 7 39 OB General Percentile Information E Show Percentile Information Select the check box if you wish to use percentile information E Percentile Criteria Select a value that will be used for percentile calculation gt GA by LMP The GA is calculated based on the maternal LMP P Estab Due Date The GA is calculated based on the Estab Due Date under Patient Information gt AUA The GA is calculate
81. E ES a 6 17 ENEE 6 18 EE 6 18 e Dr E Feel 6 20 Exam Image Management eee 6 21 Image Management es Cine Loop Images are automatically saved to the system during scanning Saved images can then be used to diagnose the patient or for reviewing purposes The saved images can be in Cine or Loop depending on the diagnosis mode Cine Images that are saved in all modes other than M Mode and Doppler Mode Loop Images that are saved in M Mode and Doppler Mode U6 2011 10 20 0001 FR32Hz 13 0em Ml0 65 2011 10 20 Doe Jane 23y0m Abdomen C2 8 Gen Tis 0 5 04 50 05 PM G50 20dB FAT P90 G55 F 1 3 00 kHz 5 00 54 50 mmi0 LE Qt 3 eee cana 10 Cine Speed E Trim First 140 Trim Last Cine Play Cine Loop Trim First Pos Trim Last Pos Cine Save Figure 6 1 Cine Loop NOTE The following functions are not supported in Cine images Probe Change Application Change and Preset Change 63 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Starting and Finishing Image Review During scanning press the Freeze button on the control panel This stops the scan and switches the unit to the image review mode screen Press the Freeze button again to return to the scan mode How to Review Images Move the cursorto the Cine or Loop bar in the user information area to review an image You can search through saved images by moving the cursor with the trackball The total number of saved images and the number of the image currently
82. Exam button exits Exam Mode and switches to the B Mode Scan screen gt End Exam Patient Pressing the End Exam button switches to the Patient Information screen E Dual Operation Select whether to activate the selected area in Dual mode When you select Auto Unfreeze the selected screen is always activated in Dual mode E 2D C Live Select the position of the Color Doppler Mode in 2D C Live Mode gt Left Color Doppler mode is positioned on the left P Right Color Doppler mode is positioned on the right E Option Used to determine which options will be used in scan mode Select an item with the trackball and the Set button to check or uncheck it gt Auto Freeze The Scan Mode is frozen automatically when the product is not used for 10 minutes N NOTE In 4D mode Auto Freeze is activated when the product is not used for 20 minutes gt HPRF Select whether to activate HPRF High Pulse Repetition Frequency which is supported in PW Spectral Doppler Mode Check the checkbox to use the HPRF function gt Color Map Auto Invert Check this checkbox to automatically highlight the Color Map This is only applied when you change Steer in 2D C D Mode C Mode or DPDI Mode in PD Mode gt Width Rescale Automatically fit the image size to the screen size when the depth of a 2D image is adjusted This function can only be used with a Linear Probe 7 18 Chapter 7 Utilities Store Clip Setting E Store Clip Method Specif
83. L and BPD are measured the ratio between them is calculated and displayed on the screen This ratio also appears in a report E Fetal Doppler trend graph Specify whether to include PI and RI graphs for MCA Mid Cerebral Artery and UA Umbilical Artery in an obstetrics report Press E and the Editor screen for the selected graph will appear E Trend graph Specify whether to include a graph for a certain item or ratio in an obstetrics report Press Hand the Editor screen for the selected graph will appear Auto Calculations MAD APD TAD APTDxTTD FTA APD TAD AC APD TAD HC BPD OFD Thc APTD TTD Mid Cerebral Artery MCAPI Trend z McARI Trend S AF Index HC AC FL BPD FL HC FLAC FL Foot Fetal Doppler Trend Graph Umbilical Artery l z UAPI Trend 9 S UA RI Trend Trend graph L FLIHc S 9 z Lv HW SI Figure 7 44 Calc amp Graph Ratio Calculations Cl BPD OFD HC AC Thc AC LV HW 7 13 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Cardiac Select the Cardiac tab from the Measure Setup screen and then configure cardiac measurement related settings Cursor amp Method E Circ and Area method Specify how the circumference and area are measured in a 2D cardiac image Either Ellipse or Trace can be selected E LV Volume Method Select the measurement method for the volume of left ventricle from between Teichholz Cubed and Gibson For more information on calcu
84. MP entered E EDD LMP With the LMP or GA entered the EDD Expected Date of Delivery is calculated and displayed Calculating EDD LMP EDD can be calculated by entering LMP or GA P When LMP is entered GA and EDD are automatically calculated and displayed on the screen P When GA is entered LMP and EDD are automatically calculated and displayed on the screen E Estab Due Date Enter the established due date using the proper format Once the expected delivery date is entered LMP GA LMP and EDD LMP are automatically calculated and displayed E Ovul Date Enter an ovulation date in the specified format LMP GA and EDD will be automatically calculated and displayed MySonoU6 Operation Manual Calculating LMP and EDD LMP with Ovul Date The following formulae are used gt LMP Ovul Date 14 P EDD 280 14 Ovul Date NOTE Values that have been calculated and entered cannot be changed Number of Fetuses Enter the number of fetuses Up to four may be entered E Day of Cycle Enter a menstrual period in number of days dd E Para Enter the number of deliveries E Gravida Enter the number of pregnancies E Aborta Enter the number of miscarriages E Ectopic Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies E New Pregnancy Deletes the patient s existing OB information 3 14 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis m Gynecology In Category select Gynecology NOTE gt
85. PA 3 WO is the ultrasonic power associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the value reported under ISPPA 3 1 28 Fc ZSP x 6 y 6 PD PRF EBD EDS Chapter 1 Safety The center frequency MHz For MI and ISPPA 3 Fc is the center frequency associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the global maximum value of the respective parameter For ISPTA 3 for combined modes involving beam types of unequal center frequency Fcis defined as the overall ranges of the center frequencies of the respective transmit patterns The axial distance at which the reported parameter is measured centimeters are respectively the in plane azimuth and out of plane elevation 6 dimensions in the x y plane where ZSP is found centimeters The pulse duration microseconds associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the reported value of the respective parameter The pulse repetition frequency Hz associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the reported value of the respective parameter The entrance beam dimensions for the azimuth and elevation planes centimeters The entrance dimensions of the scan for the azimuth and elevation planes centimeters 1 29 Acoustic Measurement Precision and Uncertainty MySonoU6 Operation Manual The Acoustic Measurement Precision and Acoustic Measurement Uncertainty are described below Quantity Precision Total Uncertainty PII 3 derat
86. Press the CW button on the control panel to enter CW Spectral Doppler Mode Press it again to return to 2D Mode CW Spectral Doppler Mode Soft Menu A The soft menu in CW mode consists of the following NOTE The soft menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility gt Menu Edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 Angle Speed 10 Step BaseLine Scale Doppler Invert Angie AutoCalc Mean Trace PP 60 Step AutoCalc Loop Size Dynamic Range Spectrum Ehn Direction Power Doppler Avg Filter N NOTE For more information on the soft menu refer to the PW Spectral Doppler Mode section 4 30 Diagnosis Modes TDI Mode NOTE Appears on the soft menu only when using the phased array probe and the cardiac application TDI stands for Tissue Doppler Imaging TDI mode represents the movements of tissues such as the heart Cannot be activated in Color Doppler mode In Color Doppler mode TDI shows cardiac tissues in color FR24Hz 16 0cm MIO 79 2011 10 21 Cardiac P2 4 Res Tls10 02 49 57 PM G50 118dB FA2 P90 G50 0 80kHz FA6 F1 8 ka Frame Avg H Color Map 11 Sensitivity 8 Balance Color Invert Off Harmonic M Line Off Write Zoom 2D C Live Figure 4 7 TDI mode Starting and Ending TDI Mode TDI Mode can be activated while in Color Doppler mode by pressing the soft menu s dial button 6 Pressing the button once more switches the mode from TDI to C 43
87. S E SPEAN EEA EELER 1 8 EM L AEAEE EEE 1 9 aM MUERE 1 9 Mechanical Satetv ENEE 1 16 IW OL 9 1 16 Moving Urs eui 1 17 Biological Safety ALARA Principle Dici M Environmental ProtectiOpisoantioiesioioti eite itti ir e toeset A PH HE ations 1 32 Battery PACK serora debite derer enit ne Gub ph etti cota atu ADD n tup eri rd 1 33 Chapter2 Introduction Specificato Re M 2 3 Product CMU Ch siiis ERE 2 6 TV Fo Ti to GRE OR 2 7 t ug ell 2 9 Console EEN 2 14 I ccc 2 16 Ee REIHE 2 18 PLODES AE 5 t E A 2 20 MySono U6 Cart sold separately EE 2 21 ee 2 22 Optional Functlons e 2 22 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Chapter3 Starting Diagnosis Power SUP IY E C AC Adapter Connection o 7 A AAOrY Powering Off stitit ttes Monitor and e e e Monitor Brightness Adjustment Nell DEM Probes ee et en 3 6 gelen eee 3 7 Application Selection n 3 8 eu Der 3 8 Patient InfoEmatlOn 3i ene 3 9 Basic Patient Information Ent 3 9 Application Specific Patient Information EEN 3 11 Searching for Patient Information 3 20 Managing Patient EXAM Sizin SSS SSE E 3 23 Changing Measurements ats 3 30 Power FANG Md
88. SA value Figure 3 11 Study Information Urology MySonoU6 Operation Manual Searching for Patient Information In the Patient Information screen select the Search tab You can search for patient information by using the following two methods Local Search Search through the information stored in the system 1 Select Local under Search Source 2 In Search By select a search condition gt Select Patient ID to search by ID or select a patient s name under Patient Name to search by name 3 Enter the ID or name in the search field and click Search The list of patients who match the criteria will be displayed gt To display a list of all the patients that are available in the system click Search All P Clicking items such as ID or Name sorts entries in alphabetical or numerical order for the selected criteria 4 Select a patient list and tap on the Apply button This applies the selected patient information to the system gt To delete the ID and all other information of the selected patient click Delete gt To select all patients in the list click Select All AS WARNING If a patient ID is deleted all related data and images stored in SONOVIEW are erased 320 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Search Source Local Patient ID Search By Patient ID Total Exams Exam Selected Gender Search Search All Select All Delete Figure 3 12 Search Local Worklist Search Perform a search by conn
89. SetiExit Key Setup SetiExit Key Switch Exit Set P Set Exit Foot Switch Save Freeze User Key Setup User Key User Key Measure Key Setup Measure Key F9 Figure 7 19 Setup User Defined Key Chapter 7 Utilities Miscellaneous Select the Miscellaneous tab on the Setup screen You can set E mail Text Network Status etc Control Trackball Speed For Scan Mode Mail SMTP Server SS Slow Normal Port No ID Trackball Speed For Measurement Password Slow Normal Fast Buzzer Control Export Image Compensation Buzzer Sound on Compensation Figure 7 20 Setup Miscellaneous E mail Enter the details of the server that this product should use to send receive e mails E Mail SMTP Server Set the e mail server E Port No Input the port number E ID Set the connection ID of the e mail server to use E Password Set the connection password of the e mail server to use 7 33 m MySonoU6 Operation Manual Buzzer Control Generate a buzzer sound when a button or dial button is used E Buzzer Sound Set this to On or Off using the trackball When this is set to on the buzzer sounds each time a button or dial button is used Control E Trackball Speed for Scan Mode Used to specify the trackball s speed in scan mode Select from Slow Normal and Fast E Trackball Speed for Measurement Used to specify the trackball s speed during measurement
90. Transferring Images section Software Your software may need to be modified to enhance the product s performance You cannot modify the software on your own a Samsung Medison service representative will help you with any software modifications N CAUTION Minor software updates may be carried out without prior notice from the manufacturer If errors occur in the operating system Windows or you desire to upgrade the operating system please follow the instructions of the operating system manufacturer 8 10 Probes OR ceeeeeeenereneUEe DPI 9 3 Ultrasound Transmission Ge 9 8 Ke c D ue EE 9 9 Probe Safety IT 9 10 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe 9 12 DE ei 9 20 BIO DS VANE OO 9 20 Vanene BIOpSy KI e nas terere tecom etes 9 21 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Biopsy Kit 9 23 Assembling the BIOPSY Kit oao 9 25 s Probes Chapter 9 Probes The probe is a device that sends and receives ultrasound for acquiring image data It is also called a Transducer or Scanhead The system limits patient contact temperature to 43 degrees Celsius and acoustic output values to their respective U S FDA limits A power protection fuse circuit protects against over current conditions If the power monitor protection circuit senses an over current condition then the drive current to the probe is shut off immediately preventing the probe surfaces from overheating and limiting acousti
91. Use the soft menu s dial button 1 Layout or the buttons on the screen A maximum of 16 images 4 X 4 can be compared at the same time The numbers shown in the layout section indicate the column and row of an image to display on the screen You can change the numbers shown in the layout section to configure various layouts Displaying in Full Screen Place the cursor on an image and press the Set button twice and then the image will be displayed in full screen Selecting Multiple Images Use the trackball and the Set button to select images The selected image is highlighted in yellow Selecting All Images Click the Select All Images icon l amp l on the screen All images saved for the current exam are selected and highlighted in yellow Deselecting All Images Click the Deselect All Images icon on the screen All images are deselected and no longer highlighted Image Management Post Processing Click the E button located at the lower left corner of an image and the post processing menu will appear Use the menu to adjust the image for diagnosis The image is not saved with the post processing effects N NOTE CINE images can only be played in the 2 x 2 or less layout Reviewing 3D Images If the saved image is 3D the 3D indication Ell appears at the bottom of the image Click 3D and the 3D View screen will appear allowing you to review the image Reviewing Cine If the saved image is CINE the playback
92. V A4C AL Dist 20 ml LVEDV A2C AL Dist 20 ml LVESV A2C AL Dist 20 ml All Continuous measurement LVAd SAX PM Epi Area cm mm LVAd SAX PM Area cm mm LV Mass LVLd Apical Distance cm mm LIV TEa Distance cm mm LV TEd All Distance cm mm All All Calculation after Distance mi Measurement LA Major All Distance cm mm LA Minor All Distance cm mm LA Diam 2D All Distance cm mm LA Ao 2D All Distance cm mm EN LA Ao M M Distance cm mm LA Diam M M Distance cm mm LAAd A2C All Area cm mm LAAs A2C All Area cm mm LAAd A4C All Area cm mm LAAs A4C All Area cm mm 544 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit RVAWd All Distance cm mm RVIDd All Distance cm mm RVAd All Area cm mm RVAWs All Distance cm mm RV QD RVIDs All Distance cm mm RVAs All Area cm mm RV Major All Distance cm mm RV Minor All Distance cm mm All All Continuous measurement RVAWd M Distance cm mm RVIDd M Distance cm mm RV M RVAWs M Distance cm mm RVIDs M Distance cm mm RVPEP M Time ms RVET M Time ms RA Major All Distance cm mm RA Minor All Distance cm mm RAAd All Area cm mm RA RAAs All Area cm mm RAEDV All Dist 20 MI RAESV All Dist 20 MI Ao Diam 2D All Distance cm mm Ao Diam M M Distance cm mm Asc Ao Diam All Distance cm mm Desc Ao Diam All Distance cm mm Aort
93. Velocity cm s m s StA Calculation after area measurement Testis Flow Calculation after distance StD measurement Vesl Area Area cm mm Vesl Dist Distance cm mm Vel A PW Velocity cm s m s Vel B PW Velocity cm s m s 5 82 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Superficial Measurement Menu Superficial Lt Mass1 Mass2 Mass3 gt Mass4 Mass5 gt Superficial Vol Superficial Flow Figure 5 25 General Superficial Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All All Calculation after distance ii measurement Mass 1 5 L All Distance cm mm Superficial Vol H All Distance cm mm W All Distance cm mm Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s StA All Calculation after area measurement Superficial Flow Calculation after distance ASD all measurement B Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm Vel A PW Velocity cm s m s Vel B PW Velocity cm s m s 5 83 MySonoU6 Operation Manual TCD Calculations NOTE P Itis convenient to calculate each measurement value on the spectral doppler image P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapte
94. Vol gt T Zone Vol Bladder Vol gt Residual Vol gt Rt Renal Vol gt Lt Renal Vol gt General Figure 5 19 General Urology Measurement Menu NOTE P The measurement methods of each menu vary with the Volume Method set at Utility gt Measure Setup gt Urology gt If the volume measurement method has been changed the measurement menu must be reconfigured accordingly P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 5 73 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E 3Distance You can calculate a volume by measuring three distances Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit Calculation after distance All All ml measurement WG Prostate Vol T Zone Vol All Distance cm mm Bladder Vol H All Distance cm mm W All Distance cm mm Calculation after distance Pre All All ml measurement Pre L All Distance cm mm Pre H All Distance cm mm Pre W All Distance cm mm Residual Vol Calculation after distance Post All All ml measurement PostL All Distance cm mm Post H All Distance cm mm Post W All Distance cm mm Calculation after distance All All ml measurement L All Distance cm mm Rt Renal Vol Lt Renal Vol H All Distance cm mm W All Distance cm mm Pelvis All
95. a Ao Arch Diam All Distance cm mm Ao Isth Diam All Distance cm mm Ao ST Junct Diam All Distance cm mm Ao Sinus Diam All Distance cm mm HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5 45 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Adult Echo Valve Measurement Menu System Pediatric Chamber Cardiac Figure 5 7 Adult Echo Valve Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit LVOT Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace LVOT Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace LVOT LVOT Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s LVOT VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm LVOT Diam All Distance cm mm AV Cusp All Distance cm mm AV Cusp M M Distance cm mm AV Diam All Distance cm mm AVA Planimetry All Area cm mm AV Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace AV Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s AV PHT PW Time ms AV VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm AV AccT PW Time ms AV AV ET PW Time ms AV DecT PW Time ms ARVCW All Distance cm mm AR Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace AR Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s AR ed Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s AR PHT PW Time ms ARVTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm AR AccT PW Time ms AR DecT PW Time ms 5 46 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All MV M M Distance cm mm MV Vp M Distance cm mm MV Diam 1 All Distance cm mm MV Diam
96. a pre mixed solution is used be sure to observe the solution expiration date gt The type of tissue it will contact during use dictates the level of disinfection required for a device Ensure that the solution strength and duration of contact are appropriate for disinfection CAUTION P Using a non recommended disinfectant or not following the recommended disinfection method can damage and or discolor the probe This could also void the probe warranty P Do not immerse probes for longer than one hour unless they are sterilizable gt Only use liquid solutions to sterilize probes Avoid using autoclave gas EtO or other non Samsung Medison approved methods 1 Follow the instructions on the disinfectant label for storage use and disposal of the disinfectant 2 Mix the disinfectant compatible with your probe according to the instructions for solution strength provided on its label 3 Immerse the probe into the disinfectant as shown in the illustration below 4 Using the instructions on the disinfectant rinse the probe after the immersion process is complete 5 Air dry the probe or towel it dry with a clean cloth Figure 9 1 Disinfection 9 19 MySonoU6 Operation Manual vi Biopsy A biopsy is an examination method that surgically extracts tissue from the patient for examination The probe and the biopsy kit are used together when conducting a biopsy with the ultrasonographic image scanner The
97. ade by the first and second straight lines gt B The angle made by the first and third straight lines 4 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen 5 87 MySonoU6 Operation Manual See the table below for Hip Joint Type information Type a p 1a 60 lt a lt 90 0 lt B lt 55 1b 60 lt a lt 90 55 180 2a b 50 lt a lt 60 0 180 2c 43 a 50 77x 180 d 43 lt a lt 50 0 lt B lt 77 3 4 0 lt a lt 43 5 88 Table 5 2 Hip Joint Types Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations ee Report The measurement results are summarized by application and shown on the screen in a report format Viewing Reports Press the Report button on the control panel The Ultrasound Report screen will appear N NOTE Only the reports for the applications that have measurement results are shown If there are too many measurement results and they cannot all fit on a single screen use the scroll bar on the right side of the screen or the Ext Menu dial button to scroll the screen up and down Click Next App to view reports for other diagnosis items Each click of the Next App Button brings up other application reports in sequence SonoReport With the Use SonoReport check box selected under Utility gt Measure Setup gt General gt Report pressing Report brings up the SonoReport screen To use a report provided by the system press the keyboard s Ins key while a measurement is being
98. agnosis E Check Probe Application amp Preset P Check the probe name and application that are displayed in the title bar Press the Probe button on the control panel to use another probe or application gt Check the preset settings in the Probe Selection screen E Measurement Menu Settings You can customize the measurement menu to include selected items only For more information on customizing the measurement menu refer to the Setting Measurements section in Chapter 7 Utilities Measurement Operations The following gives information on the common button operations for measurements E Select Measurement Item Use the trackball or the Ext Menu dial button to move the cursor and then press the Set button or the Ext Menu dial button To configure the measurement menu items go to Utility Measure Setup General Calc Menu 5 2 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Change Measurement Method Press the Change button on the control panel If the current measurement item can be measured in more than one way the measurement method is changed The current measurement method is displayed in the user information area Once measurement is started the method cannot be changed E Changing Measurement Unit End the current measurement and select the desired unit from Utility Measure Setup General General Display Measurement Unit E Delete Trace Line Delete a trace line by moving the trackball in the
99. aintenance in particular contain important safety information and must be thoroughly understood E This manual does not include diagnosis results or opinions Also check the reference information for the measured area of the body before using the application s measurement results in any diagnosis E This product is an ultrasound diagnosis device and cannot be used from the user s PC We are not responsible for errors that occur when the system is run on a user s PC E Only medical doctors or persons supervised by medical doctors should use this system Persons who are not qualified must not operate this product E The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage to this product caused by user carelessness and or neglect E The contents and specifications described in this manual may be changed without notice E Non Samsung Medison product names may be trademarks of their respective owners E The following terms are used to highlight safety precautions that the user must be aware of DANGER Ignoring a DANGER warning will risk life threatening injury WARNING The accompanying information must be followed to prevent serious accidents and or damage to property CAUTION The accompanying information helps to avoid accidents and or damage to property NOTE The accompanying information covers an installation operation or maintenance procedure that requires careful attention from the user but has little chance of leading directly to
100. al Doppler Mode N NOTE For information on miscellaneous settings refer to Chapter 7 Utilities 35 a MySonoUG Operation Manual vi Probes amp Applications Before scanning you need to select a probe and an application NOTE Refer to Chapter 9 Probes for more information on probes and applications supported by the system Gynecology General General Renal Default User User User 4 User4 User Abdomen C2 8 OB OBEarly FetalHeart General Cancel Figure 3 1 Probe Selection 36 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Probe Selection Screen Press the Probe button on the control panel to load the Probe Selection screen From this screen you can select an application and change the probe settings The Probe Selection screen consists of the following Connected probe Application list Preset list Userset list Probe Connection Be sure to connect or disconnect probes when the power is off to ensure the safety of the system and the probes 1 Lift up the probe s lockdown switch and disconnect the probe 2 Connect the probe to the probe port 3 Push down the probe s lockdown switch to lock it in place NOTE Debris trapped between the probe and the port can cause connection problems If you experience a connection problem attempt to remove any debris and try again 34 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Application Selection Select an application from the Probe Selectio
101. alculation Select a calculation and click m Selecting a calculation from Available Menu List that has the symbol also selects all sub calculations belonging to that calculation However you cannot add whole calculation packages 7 61 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Select Cale Package OB Check Calc Tabs You can create 4 of new Calc Tabs GS YS EE j CRL Early General ei Factory Report Select the Report tab under the General tab Here you can set items related to the measurement report and printing Use SonoReport Hospital Info Hospital Name Diag Physician Ref Physician Sonographer Others Description Accession Use SonoReport The format provided by SonoReport is used instead of the report format provided by Samsung Medison With the check box selected pressing the control panel s Report button while taking a OB or GY measurement brings up the SonoReport screen 7 62 Calc Menu Preview Use Ctrl Key for MultiSelect NT NB BPD FL AC EFW Duct Venosus Fetal HR Calc Menu Designer Available Menu List 0B E2 General Figure 7 35 General Calc Menu Report Header Patient Info ID Name Gender Heart Rate BirthDate Age BSA Weight Height Measurement Result Measurement Result Type Avg OB FH Header Layout EFW GA EFW S Gravida Aborta Para Ectopic Figure 7 36 General Report Chapter 7 Utilities NOTE You need a program supplied
102. ame item more than once measurements can be displayed in four ways On the Edit Report screen you can specify or change the measurement display method E Avg Obtain the average of the measurements and display it on the screen E Last Display the last measurement on the screen E Max Display the largest value of the measurements on the screen E Min Display the smallest value of the measurements on the screen 5 9 SSI MySonoU6 Operation Manual 2011 10 23 M U6 Ultrasound Report OB Institution Diag Physician Ref Physician Sonographer ID 2011 10 20 0002 Exam Date HR bpm Name BirthDate E Gender Female Age y Height Weight BSA Description Accession LMP Estab Due Date GA LMP AUA EDD LMP EDD AUA EFW Author Hadlock2 BPD AC FL EFW GA EFW Pctl EFW SD EFW Avg E GS CRL YS BPD OFD HC APD TAD MAD AC ETA Patient Info Detailed Comment Next App Cancel IEE Ee ee ee Figure 5 30 Edit Report 5 92 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations m Adding Comments U6 Ultrasound Report OB 2011 10 23 02 31 25 PM Vol Flow A n Vesl Dist Vol Flow D Cervix L Placenta Thick Uterus KE Lt Ovary Rt Ovary E Adnexa Kidneys E Comment Next App Figure 5 31 Comment Clicking Comment while in the Ultrasound Report screen enables text input This enables you to enter opinions or findings Alternatively you can edit any existing comments Clicking the scree
103. an image to print specify the interpolation Select Replicate Bilinear Cubic or None E Border Density Specify the border color of an image to print Select Black or White E Empty Density Specify the background color of an image to print Select Black or White E Min Density Specify the minimum brightness of an image to print If this option is not specified the default value is applied E Max Density Specify the maximum brightness of an image to print If this option is not specified the default value is applied 7 43 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Medium Type Specify the material type for the print out Select from Paper Clear Film Blue Film Mammo Clear Film and Mammo Blue Film E Film Size Specify the paper size Select from 8 inch x 10 inch 5 inch x 11 inch 10 inch x 12 inch 10 inch x 14 inch 11 inch x 14 inch 11 inch x 17 inch 14 inch x 14 inch 14 inch x 17 inch 24cm x 24cm 24cm x 30cm A4 and A3 E Destination Specify the paper pathway Select Magazine or Processor E Smoothing Type This option is available only when Magnification is set to CUBIC Enter a value for the printer which is specified in the DICOM Conformance Statement E Priority Specify a priority for the print command Select from High Med and Low E Copies Enter the number of copies between 1 and 99 E Configuration Info Enter the printer s information Please refer to the DICOM Conformance Statement for the prin
104. and components are described below Figure 2 6 Console 2 14 Console Left Side D We amp Console Right Side Ki mw a a He d Ht Console Rear 9 Chapter 2 Introduction Security Lock Port Kensington Lock USB Port Microphone Port Audio Port Probe Port Probe Lock Switch USB Port Video DVI I port Network Port Power Port NOTE For instructions on connecting an AC adapter to the power port refer to Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis 2 15 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Peripheral Devices Peripheral devices can be connected to their corresponding ports on the left or rear sides of the product CAUTION Do not place peripheral devices not listed in this manual inside the patient environment If you place them in the patient environment it may cause electrical hazard Figure 2 7 Patient Environment CAUTION When using a peripheral device via a USB port always turn the power off before connecting disconnecting the device Connection disconnection of USB devices during power on may lead to malfunction of the system and the USB devices NOTE For instructions on using a specific peripheral device refer to
105. apter 8 Maintenance vi Battery Pack Management The battery pack is a consumable and will lose performance over time If the battery life becomes less than half of what it was when first purchased it is time for a replacement CAUTION P The basic warranty period for battery packs is six months P Samsung Medison recommends that you replace the battery pack once a year N NOTE For battery pack purchase inquiries please contact Samsung Medison s service department Replacing the Battery Pack Battery Pack Removal Remove the battery pack as follows 1 Turn off the system and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet 2 Open the battery cover at the bottom of the product and remove the battery pack WARNING Remove the battery pack if you are not planning to use the product Leaving the product unused and not plugged into a power outlet for an extended period of time may deplete the battery pack completely making it impossible to recharge the batteries In addition allowing the battery pack to become completely depleted may cause communication problems for the product Battery Pack Installation Connect the battery pack as follows 1 Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet 2 Open the battery cover at the bottom of the product and insert the battery pack N CAUTION Make sure not to mix up the battery terminals 3 Once the battery pack has been inserted wait ten sec
106. ation gt Exam Date The date of the exam Images Number of images on record gt Measurements Measurement status gt SR Structured report status SE Stress echo exam status SC Exam transfer status Storage Commit Lock Status Lock status Clicking items such as Patient ID or Name sorts entries into alphabetical or numerical order for the selected criteria Exam Date 4 Images Measure 2011 07 19 0001 Doe Jane 2011 07 25 E 201107 19 0001 ane 23 2011 07 19 Continue Exam Review Delete Backup Figure 3 14 Exam View 3 23 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Executing Exam Select an exam and then click Review Exam or Continue Exam on the screen For an exam currently being executed the button is displayed as Current Exam and disabled corner is displayed as Continue Exam If the exam was executed earlier than this the button is NOTE If the selected exam has been executed in the past 24 hours the button in the lower left displayed as Review Exam E Continue Exam In addition to using the Resume Exam function you can update the current scan with the exam executed previously The selected exam appears on the screen and scanning is available The date when the exam was resumed Exam Resumed is displayed in the feedback area Double clicking a stored image in the thumbnail area on the right side of the screen retrieves the image and displays the stored image information In the retrie
107. attery Pack If you are not planning on using your MySono U6 unit remove the battery pack from the unit and store it separately Storage temperature ranges are as follows Duration of Storage Ambient Temperature Less than 1 month 10 60 C 1 3 months 10 45 C 4 12 months 10 30 C For more information on storing and using the battery pack refer to the Operational Environment section in this chapter three months completely charge and discharge the battery pack a few CAUTION If you are using your battery pack for the first time or using a battery pack that has not been used for more than times before use Complete Charge and Discharge 1 Insert a fully charged battery pack into MySono U6 and wait until the batteries completely discharge and shut down the system A fully charged battery pack will take about an hour to fully discharge The battery status indicator will turn from green to orange as the battery pack discharges 2 Connect the AC adapter and fully recharge the battery pack Once fully recharged the battery status indicator will turn green It takes approxima ely three hours to fully recharge a fully discharged battery pack It takes about twice as long if the system is in use while the battery pack is being recharged 3 Discharge the battery pack once more until the system shuts down Disposing of the Battery Pack Battery pack disposal must b
108. ay returns to the previous screen E Transparency Set the transparency of a 3D image Set to a value between 20 and 250 by rotating the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu The lowest value 20 is for complete transparency and the highest value 250 is for complete opacity 4 46 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes ai NOTE Transparency is only available with 2D 3D ROI 3D and Fixed 3D E U D Flip Press the soft menu dial button 3 This flips the image vertically E RotateX Y Z Rotates the image in the direction of the selected axis Use soft menu dial buttons 4 5 and 6 to rotate the image in the direction of the X Y and Z axes respectively E Gain to Ref Slice Ref Slice to Gain Press the soft menu s dial button 4 and then use the control panel s Gain dial button to adjust these settings Z N NOTE These options are only available in 4D mode P Gain to Ref Slice Use the Gain dial button to adjust the Ref Slice gt Ref Slice to Gain Use the Gain dial button to change the 3D Images Gain E Next Page Press the soft menu dial button 6 to move to the next page E Select Rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 and choose the post curve you wish to change N NOTE Select is only available with 2D 3D ROI 3D and Fixed 3D E Position Used to reposition the post curve selected under Select Rotate the soft menu s dial button 2 and set to a value between 0 and 100 447 MySonoU6 Opera
109. aying Images The saved images can be played in SONOVIEW or in a diagnosis mode Viewing Images in SONOVIEW N NOTE Refer to the SONOVIEW section in this chapter Viewing Images in Diagnosis Mode Use the Pointer button on the control panel Note that this function is available only when there are images saved in the thumbnail list 1 Press the Pointer button and the cursor will appear on the screen 2 Select an image you wish to view from the thumbnail list The image is displayed in the image area In Dual mode you can view images by specifying a location 3D View is loaded for 3D images 6 15 MySonoU6 Operation Manual es Transferring and Printing Images Transferring Images This product allows you to transfer images to PACS systems that support DICOM You can transfer all saved images automatically or select a desired image and transfer it manually For information on the DICOM server settings and DICOM operations please refer to DICOM in Chapter 7 Utilities Transferring Images in Diagnosis Mode This product allows you to transfer images automatically Images are transferred by using the transmission method of the storage server DICOM Settings To configure the DICOM server go to Utility gt Setup gt DICOM For a more detailed description refer to Chapter 7 Utilities Transferring Images from SONOVIEW This product also allows you to transfer images manually The following two meth
110. bdomen C2 8 Gen Tis 0 3 09 38 08 AM G50 120dB FA9 P90 Kik Angle Degree 15 Exit Figure 6 5 BodyMarker Input Mode Starting BodyMarker Input Mode Press the keyboard s BodyMarker key This activates the BodyMarker input mode and displays the BodyMarkers in the thumbnail area NOTE If Utility gt Setup gt General gt Scan Mode gt Freeze Action is set to BodyMarker pressing the Freeze button immediately activates the BodyMarker input mode 6 10 Chapter 6 Image Management Inserting BodyMarkers 1 Pressing the BodyMarker key displays the BodyMarker list in the thumbnail area gt The BodyMarker list displayed in the thumbnail area varies depending on the selected application gt A maximum of 5 BodyMarkers are displayed on the screen at any one time If more than 5 BodyMarkers have been provided repeatedly press the BodyMarker key or rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 to navigate through the pages 2 Press the soft menu s dial button that corresponds to the desired BodyMarker The BodyMarker is inserted into the image 3 Adjust the position and angle of the BodyMarker s probe cursor gt Probe Cursor Positioning Use the trackball on the control panel gt Probe Cursor Angle Adjustment Use the control panel s Angle dial button Rotate the soft menu s dial button 6 and select between 15 C and 45 C 4 Once you have finished press the Set button on the control panel To cancel press the contro
111. being reviewed are shown next to the bar Cine Loop Soft Menu The soft menu is changed when images are reviewed NOTE The soft menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility Menu Edit B Cine Speed Used to adjust automatic Cine or Loop playback speed Adjust the speed to between 1096 and 20096 by rotating the 2 dial button beneath the soft menu Adjustment is made in 1096 increments E Cine Play Pressing the soft menu s dial button 2 starts pauses the playback E Cine Loop Used to switch between the cine and loop bars for image review Activated only when both Cine and Loop are available such as in M Mode or Spectral Doppler Mode Press the soft menu s dial button 3 and select Cine or Loop Pressing the button displays the selected bar type in the user information area Select Cine Loop You can also select a bar by pressing the control panel s Change button 64 Chapter 6 Image Management E Trim First You can specify the first frame of the range that you wish to save as part of the Cine or Loop Rotate the soft menus dial button 4 or use the trackball to position the frame E Trim First Pos Pressing the soft menu s dial button 4 saves the selected position as the first frame E Trim Last You can specify the last frame of the range that you wish to save as part of the Cine or Loop Rotate the soft menu s dial button 5 or use the trackball to position the frame E
112. brings up the Post Processing screen E Invert Click this button to turn this option on or off Turning this option on inverts slice image brightness E Auto Contrast Click this button to turn this option on or off Turning this option on automatically adjusts the slice image contrast level E Thres Changing the threshold eliminates levels of brightness that are not necessary for the image Click this button to turn this option on or off Turning this option on creates Th Low and Th High options in the menu P Th Low Use the soft menu s dial button 3 to select the function gt Th High Use the 4 dial button on the soft menu to select the function E Sharp Used to adjust the slice image s boundaries Click this button to turn this option on or off Turning this option on creates the Sharp option in the soft menu P Sharp Set the sharpness of the slice image s boundaries to a value between 100 and 400 by using the 6 dial button beneath the soft menu The higher the number the sharper the boundaries 4 61 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E 3D CI This feature combines images to eliminate noise and increase picture quality Turning this option on creates the CSI Offset option in the soft menu 3D CI is an abbreviation for 3D Compound Imaging P CSI Offset CSI or Compound of Sectional Image overlaps images to create a higher quality C plane image Select the distance between images used for 3D CI from 1 10 by
113. button while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard 327 3 28 MySonoU6 Operation Manual In Drive select the device on which the exam will be saved In File Name enter the file name The same file name is given to all images of an exam When an exam contains multiple images a serial number is automatically added to the end of the file name In File Format select the format in which the files will be saved You can select BMP JPEG TIFF or DICOM In Export Option select the options to apply to the files You can select multiple options gt 3D Volume Data Export the 3D volume data together with the image gt 2D Cine Export the stored Cine images after converting them to video files AVI files gt 3D and Live Cine Export 3D Cine and Live Cine images after converting them to video files AVI files gt Hide Patient Information Export images from which the patient ID and name have been deleted In Directory select the location where you want to save the exam To create a new directory click EM and enter the name To delete a directory click E In Files the files currently saved in the selected directory are displayed Click Export to begin exporting Click Close to cancel Image Export Directories Drive File Name File Format Export Option lume Data Figure 3 17 Image Export Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Backing up the Exam You can back up the selected exams
114. by SonoReport to use this function For detailed information please contact the Samsung Medison customer service department in your area Report Header Specify header options for reports You can specify multiple items which will appear in all measurement reports E Hospital Info This is information about the hospital in which the product is installed E Patient Info This is information about the patient E Others This information concerns other comments Measurement Result E Measurement Result Type Used to specify the method of calculating measurement values in the reports gt Average Produces the average value of the three most recent measurements gt Last Shows the value measured last gt Max Shows the largest measurement value B Min Shows the smallest measurement value OB FH Header Layout Specify item s to display under the header of obstetrics or fetal echo measurement reports You can select multiple items 7 63 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Data Transfer Select the sub tab Data Transfer under the General tab Here you can set the data transfer method etc Serial Transfer Text Format XML Format User Table Backup and Restore Backup Restore DICOM SR Format General Report Figure 7 37 General Data Transfer Serial Transfer Specify the format in which data will be transferred Select Text Format or XML Format This product uses an RS 232C USB serial cab
115. c International LTD 1 403 286 1771 USA Wavicide Wave Energy System Inc 1 800 252 1125 USA 9 17 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Cleaning Cleaning is an important procedure that is carried out before disinfecting the probe The probe must be cleaned after each use CAUTION P Do not use a surgical brush when cleaning probes Even the use of soft brushes can damage the probe P During cleaning and disinfection keep the parts of the probe that must remain dry higher than the other parts during wetting until all parts are dry 1 Disconnect the probe from the system 2 Remove any biopsy adapters or biopsy needle guides Biopsy adapters are re usable and can be disinfected 3 Remove the sheath Sheaths are single use items 4 Use a soft cloth lightly dampened with mild soap or compatible cleaning solution to remove any particulate matter and bodily fluids that remain on the probe or cable 5 To remove remaining particulates rinse with water up to the immersion point 6 Wipe with a dry cloth 7 If necessary wipe first with a water dampened cloth to remove soap residue and wipe with a dry cloth again 9 18 Chapter 9 Probes Disinfection A 10 reduction in pathogens should be reached by following the disinfection procedures in this Manual and using the following Samsung Medison recommended solutions The disinfection method applies to the vaginal and rectal probes only WARNING gt If
116. c output Probe List The ultrasound image scanner uses probes to obtain graphic data of the human body and then displays it on the screen Always use application specific probes in order to obtain the best quality images It is also important to configure the presets with the best settings for the particular organ being scanned E Probe Applications and Presets Probes applications and presets available for this product are as follows Probes Application Preset Abdomen General Renal C2 5 Gynecology General OB General FetalHeart Early Abdomen General Renal C2 8 Gynecology General OB General FetalHeart Early Pediatric General NeoHead C4 9 Abdomen General Vascular General Musculoskeletal General LN5 12 Small Parts General Breast Vascular General 93 MySonoU6 Operation Manual A 94 Probes Application Preset Abdomen General P2 4 Cardiac General TCD General Gynecology Adnexa Uterus EVN4 9 OB 1 Trimester Urology Prostate Abdomen General Renal 3DC2 6 Gynecology General OB General Early Fetal Heart Urology General 3D4 9 OB General Early Gynecology General CW2 0 Cardiac General NOTE P In addition to the standard presets users can also create up to five of their own which can be accessed by selecting User 1 5 P For information on presets refer to Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis E Function list
117. cel button without checking this checkbox the cancel message is sent to the RIS server Services PPS IP Address Alias AE Title Port Mo 404 Retry Interval 39 Connect Timeout 45 Maximum Retries 1 Always complete exams Figure 7 27 DICOM Configuration PPS SC Server Information Select SC Storage Commitment under Services Configure the Storage Commitment Service using DICOM The Storage Commitment Service is used after a diagnosis is finished and all saved images and reports are transferred E Associated Storage Server Select an Image Storage server to connect to Services Associated Storage Server to IP Address AE Title PortNo 404 Retry Interval 39 Connect Timeout Maximum Retries 1 Figure 7 28 DICOM Configuration SC 7 48 Chapter 7 Utilities Storage SR Server Information Select Storage SR Storage Structured Report under Services Configure the Report Storage Service using DICOM The configuration options are the same as those for the storage server Services STORAGE SR Alae IP Address AE Title Port No 404 Transfer Mode Retry Interval 30 Connect Timeout Maximum Retries 1 Figure 7 29 DICOM Configuration Storage SR Editing DICOM Info Select a service and click Edit on the screen The information on the selected service will appear After changing the information click Save to save the changes Click Cancel to cancel
118. check the following P The connection of the LAN cable gt Settings from Utility gt Setup gt Miscellaneous P ICMP ping status for the concerned mail server should be open If ICMP ping is closed the e mail function may not work properly 627 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Figure 6 14 E mail Deleting Images Click the Delete Image icon LES on the screen Press OK to delete the selected image Please note that images for the current patient under diagnosis cannot be deleted Storage Manager Clickthe Device icon Eon the screen The Storage Manager window will appear For more information about Storage Manager refer to Chapter 7 Utilities Closing SONOVIEW Click the Exit icon on the screen Alternatively press the keyboard s SONOVIEW key or the control panel s Exit button to exit from SONOVIEW 6 28 Utilities DR 7 3 DR 7 5 DR EN ee EE Z Re 7 9 Monitoncalibrati E 7 9 GAMMA aoee erieeerecerieeerrereriererrererie e nieto R 7 12 2D POS EE 7 12 Gol Org DEE 7 14 rer 7 15 MPOST ee aa E A AAA 7 15 EE 7 16 ES EE 7 17 Displays eee EUREN I UNES 7 20 lte 7 24 Peripherals sse em eMe e EE dE 7 29 User DetinediKeys carts tnt ence thie ru eR 7 31 Mellt ee 7 33 lee 7 35 DOM Oe E A kee 7 37 AUTOGA AE a E AIA A 7 54 m Measurement Settings 7 56 HE 7 57 EE 7 66 Glo 7 74 Va e E E cere ee 7 76 eer VE 7 78 Eetalikleantese eee ERR rene 7 80 E Storage leng
119. checked all of the text that has been entered is deleted at once when you return to scan mode by pressing the Freeze button E Boot up Caps Lock on If this checkbox is checked Boot up Caps Lock On is turned on This means that when text is entered it is entered in capital letters E Autotext If an abbreviation is entered the system retrieves and enters a full word automatically When this option is selected you can enter text more easily and quickly For example if you input AC the system will search for the full word and display it on the screen as Abdominal Circumference To enable Auto Text check the AutoText checkbox by using the trackball Otherwise uncheck the checkbox If this option is selected an abbreviation list appears on the screen when text is entered 4 Chamber Abdominal Circumference Figure 7 16 Abbreviation list 7 26 Chapter 7 Utilities The system contains a list of abbreviated words for this function You can add a new abbreviation or edit the existing abbreviations as desired Editing the Abbreviation List To enable the abbreviation list stored in the system click the Autotext Edit button The system will switch to the Autotext Edit screen To save the changes and finish editing click the Close button gt Modifying a word Use the trackball and the Set button to select a word to modify from the list An abbreviation for the selected word and its full version are di
120. cm s m s RAP PW RAP mmHg TV E A PW Continuous measurement RVOT Diam All Distance cm mm PV Ann Diam All Distance cm mm Rt Outflow PV AccT PW Time ms PR DecT PW Time ms PR Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5 54 Carotid Calculations Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 General Measurement Menu Carotid Prox CCA gt Mid CCA gt Distal CCA gt Bulb gt ECA gt Prox ICA Mid ICA gt Distal ICA gt Vertebral A gt General gt Vol Flow HR Figure 5 10 General Carotid easurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit BAR Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Mid CCA PSV PW Velocity cm s m s Distal CCA Bulb EDV PW Velocity cm s m s ECA 96StA All Area 96 Prox ICA Mid ICA StD All Distance HS IMT All Distance cm mm 5 55 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Method Unit Auto Trace Doppler spectrum Trace Limited Trace Doppler spectrum Trace Manual Trace Doppler spectrum Trace
121. ctions below before using the battery pack WARNING gt Comply with all instructions concerning charging and discharging the battery pack and the temperature at which it should be stored For more information on the recommended temperature range refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance P When connecting the battery pack be aware of the polarity of the electrodes Mixing up the polarity can cause the battery pack to short circuit Do not disassemble or modify the battery pack vvv v Do not leave the battery pack in direct sunlight vvv vy P Do not try to solder or repair the battery pack P Do not connect the battery pack to an electrica gt If you are not planning on using your MySono U battery pack from the unit and store it separately Do not allow the battery pack s electrodes to come into contact with metallic objects Do not expose the battery pack to heat or set it on fire Do not store or use the battery pack in the vicinity of a heat generating device or an open flame ake sure not to subject the battery pack to temperatures in excess of 60 Do not handle the battery pack using sharp objects Do not subject the battery pack to impact Do not step on the battery pack f the battery pack has been damaged do not use it outlet 6 unit for more than a month remove the CAUTION The battery pack can damage the product if it explodes catches on fire or starts to produce smoke See below for mo
122. ctral doppler image PW Spectral Doppler Mode Screen E Sample Volume The Doppler spectrum is displayed when the sample volume is located above the blood flow on the 2D image The size and depth of Sample volume is displayed in mm units Its position is moved with the trackball and displayed in the xx xx yy yy mm format The information is formatted to indicate a sample volume that is xx xx mm in size at a depth of yy yy mm For example 2 00 16 70mm means a 2 00mm sample volume at 16 70mm in depth gt Moving Sample Volume Use the trackball on the control panel gt Resizing Sample Volume After pressing the Change button on the control panel adjust the size of the sample volume by using the trackball Press the Change button again to return to the Sample Volume Position Control screen Here an icon is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen to indicate whether the trackball is set to SV Position or SV Size gt Adjusting Sample Volume Angle Use the control panel s Angle dial button to adjust the sample volume angle Rotating the Angle dial button clockwise increases the angle within a range of 70 to 70 E HPRF NOTE P Enable disable HPRF from Utility gt Setup gt General gt Scan Mode gt Option gt HPRF is not activated in Simultaneous Mode In addition HPRF cannot be enabled if 200 of PRF is higher than 23KHz Adjust the blood flow above the speed limit at a specific depth Using this functions doubles
123. cursor on the ROI box and use the trackball and the Set button to adjust the boundaries E Moving an Image Place the trackball pointer on the image to move and move it while pressing the Set button Or you may move it by using the trackball when the trackball is in Move state gt Set Button Rotates the image around the center gt Exit Button Moves the image up down left or right E Rotating Image to the X axis Use the 4 dial button on the soft menu Or move the trackball when it is in Cursor state on the A Plane image while pressing the Set button E Rotating Image to the Y axis Use the 5 dial button on the soft menu Or move the trackball when it is in Cursor state on the B Plane image while pressing the Set button 443 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Rotating Image to the Z axis Use the soft menu s dial button 6 Or move the trackball when it is in Cursor state on the C Plane while pressing the Set button E Show Hide Menu To have the menu appear on the screen press the control panel s Ext Menu dial button Press the Exit to hide the menu E Item Selection Use the control panel s Ext Menu dial button to select an item E Return to Previous Menu Press the menu s Return or Exit button to return to the previous menu Alternatively you can use the control panel s Exit button E Changing View Mode Use the Active Mode button to change the view mode Or you can use the control panel s trackball
124. d E LV Volume Method Specify how the volume of the left ventricle is measured For more information on calculation formulae please refer to the reference manual 7 80 Chapter 7 Utilities FH Measurement Result E Measurement Result Type Specify the measurement method Select Avg Last Max or Min value Number of Measure Results Displayed Number of Results Displayed Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen 7 81 MySonoU6 Operation Manual es Storage Manager Select Storage Manager from the utility menu All disk drives mounted in the system will be shown The drive type available space and total space for each drive are displayed Storage Manager is a program that lets you manage various storage devices connected to the system You can remove format or update a drive if you check the checkbox in front of the drive s symbol PX NOTE You may not remove format or update a drive mounted within the system itself Click Exit on the screen or press Exit on the control panel to exit Storage Manager Drive Drive Type Free Disk Size Total Disk Size FIXED DRIVE FIXED DRIVE FIXED DRIVE FIXED DRIVE Refresh Figure 7 49 Storage Manager E Refresh Updates the display on the touch screen to show the drives currently connected to the system 7 NOTE When using Storage Manager you should click Refresh to update the information 7 82 Chapter 7 Uti
125. d from Group Current page Total pages is displayed below the list If there is a total of two or more pages you can move to other pages by using c or Bodymarker list for the probe or preset currently being used Current page Total pages is displayed below the list If there is a total of two or more pages you can move to other pages by using c or SCH NOTE You can add or save between 1 and 100 BodyMarkers in each list gt Adding a BodyMarker Select and double click a BodyMarker in the list on the left The selected BodyMarker is added to the list on the right The right list cannot have duplicated BodyMarkers If this occurs a warning message will pop up gt Removing a BodyMarker Select and double click a BodyMarker in the list 9 on the right 7 25 MySonoU6 Operation Manual gt Saving and Canceling the BodyMarker list Click Save to save the list Click Close to cancel gt Resetting the BodyMarker list Click Reset This restores the system s default settings Text Setup Used to configure text input related options E Quick Text If the checkbox is selected the Quick Text function is enabled With Quick Text enabled pressing any keyboard key immediately activates text input mode NOTE P The Quick Text checkbox is checked by system default P With Quick Text disabled pressing the keyboard s Text button activates text input mode E Auto Text Erase If this checkbox is
126. d simultaneously in real time E DMR NOTE gt DMR is an optional feature of this product gt DMR is not available if SRF is turned on Press the soft menu dial button 6 Removes the noise in images and intensifies boundary lines to make images more vivid Turning DMR on displays S on the right side of the screen and creates the DMR Index option in the soft menu E DMR Index This option only appears in the soft menu when DMR is turned on Three predefined indexes are available Set to a value between 1 and 3 by rotating the 6 dial button beneath the soft menu E Rotation Rotating the soft menu s dial button 1 in a clockwise direction rotates the image accordingly Each rotation rotates the image by 90 degrees E L R Flip Pressing the soft menu s dial button 1 flips the image horizontally The M mark located on the upper part of the image indicates the current image direction E Frame Rate Frame rate refers to how frequently the image is updated over the span of one second Rotate the soft menu s dial button 2 and choose from Fast Normal and Slow A higher frame rate is better suited for scanning fast moving organs MySonoU6 Operation Manual E U D Flip Press the soft menus dial button 2 Each press of the dial button flips the image vertically E Line Density Set the scan line density Select from Medium High and Low by rotating the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu Selecting Hig
127. d using the average values Average US GA of several ultrasound measurements 7 66 Chapter 7 Utilities E Rank Information Method Specify how the growth range information will be displayed The growth range information can be used to observe fetal development and abnormality gt Standard Deviation International standard deviation is used to indicate the fetal development Fetal development and abnormality are observed on the basis of SD 0 which indicates the standard development gt Pctl Fetal development is indicated in percentile Fetal development and abnormality are observed on the basis of 5096 which indicates the standard development gt Bar Graph The percentile is shown in a bar graph This option is available with OB reports only The green color indicates normal development range while the red color indicates abnormal development range Fetal Weight Unit Specify the units for fetal weight measurement You can select the primary unit and the secondary unit to display measurement results The primary unit can be either Grams g or Ib oz on the left The secondary unit can be selected on the right A unit already specified as the primary unit cannot be used Ib oz is a unit combining pounds and ounces and None indicates that no units are used Clear Function on UnFreeze This function is applied to obstetrics only E Clear Measure 2D Mode Result On UnFreeze Check the checkbox to delete 2D m
128. der Select the patient s gender E Accession When viewing the work list for a patient via the DICOM server this information is automatically displayed in the appropriate fields ID Auto ID Creation Last Family Age First Given Gender Middle Accession Cancel Figure 3 2 The Patient Information 3 10 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Application Specific Patient Information You can add or change application specific patient information 1 In the Patient Information screen press the Study Information tab 2 Select an application under Category 3 Enter additional information required for diagnosis gt To delete all past measurement values click Clear Measure on the screen General In Category select General Enter additional information The items in General are also included in the patient information screen for other applications E Height Enter the patient s height Height can be specified in inches in or centimeters cm Click the unit button to change the unit When the unit is changed the entered number is automatically recalculated and displayed in the new unit of measurement E Weight Enter the patient s weight Supported units are ounces oz pounds Ib and kilograms Kg Click the corresponding unit button to change the unit of measurement E BSA When the height and weight are entered the BSA Body Surface Area is automatically calculated and displayed E HR Enter a heart
129. dy producing an echo where density changes occur For example in the case of tissue an echo is created where a signal passes from an adipose tissue region to a muscular tissue region The echoes return to the probe where they are converted back in w in o electrical signals These echo signals are highly amplified and processed by analog and digital circuits having filters ith many frequency and time response options transforming the high frequency electrical signals o a series of digital image signals which are stored in memory Once in memory the image can be displayed in real time on the image monitor All signal transmission reception and processing ch aracteristics are controlled by computer Introduction Monitor Ultrasound images and other information are displayed on the color LCD monitor Screen Layout The monitor displays ultrasound images operation menus and a variety of other information The screen is divided into five areas Title area Image area amp Thumbnail area User information area and Soft menu U6 2011 10 29 0002 FR 31Hz 3 5cm MI 0 92 2011 10 29 Doe Jane 23y0m Vascular LN5 12 Gen Tis 0 2 10 25 31 AM e E FA10 P90 a M Exam Resumed e Q EE Frame Avg 10 Dynamic Range 105 RejectLevel 8 Edge Enhance 0 Focus 2 5 H Frequency Harmonic M Line Off 2DiC Live DMR oft Figure 2 2 Monitor Display Title Area Displays patient name hospital name app
130. e aidenduiseniQu ipad madida optima RR PEE HC KE sdas Nut Rp 3 33 Chapter A Diagnosis Modes edu Ee sss DNE OT 4 3 Types of Diagnosis Modes sirier 4 3 ee lt INSU o om 4 4 Basie MOde erc 4 6 Eelere 4 6 M Mode c 4 13 Color Doppler Mode 4 16 Power Doppler Mode 4 20 PW Spectral Doppler Mode EE 4 23 CW Spectral Doppler Mode ENEE 4 29 IDE n CAE 4 31 TDW Mode neant 4 33 elei MOG err 4 35 VOI PW MOG E 4 35 Table of Contents 2D PD PW Mode ZD C CW M oro E QD PD CW Tore TE 4 35 ZD C M Woo E 4 36 KRICH E 4 36 DD TY MI EE 4 37 e DYAB ENE EE 4 38 EDE Le o N O 4 39 HSG 4 42 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measuremient ACCUFagcy ee 5 3 Causes of Measurement EITOTS EEN 5 3 Optimization of Measurement ACCULACY ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssccsssssccscsscssescessccseccscccecceeseeeeseseeee 5 5 Measurement Accuracy Table E 5 7 Basic Measurement Ses ee 5 8 Distance Measurement ENEE 5 11 Measurement of Circumference and Area 5 16 Volume Measuremenmt EEN 5 18 Calculations be Applicatiori sessccsscacssccesecseconsescen acecussacciscanstecanasaecuacansvecannsbechaesscas a 5 21 Things to note kt esat 5 21 Common Measurement Methods EEN 5 25 OB Calculations sssssssssess010 Gynecology Calculations Cardiac CANCUN Sizarista COO Carotid CalculatiOTiS i
131. e an accurate trace or results Furthermore during auto calculation results will not be displayed if the Freeze function is run against inaccurate values E Baseline Use the 5 dial button on the soft menu Rotate the dial button and adjust the position of the Doppler Images horizontal axis E Mean Trace N NOTE Appears in the soft menu when AutoCalc is turned on Performs a Doppler trace and displays the mean value Press the soft menu s dial button 5 to turn on or off E Display Format Used to configure 2D image and PW image layout Rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 and choose one E Doppler Average Press the soft menu s dial button 2 to turn on or off Once turned on you can use FDRP Fast DRP to increase the quality of Spectral Doppler image E Spectrum Ehn Used to adjust Spectral Doppler image brightness and sensitivity levels Set to a value between 1 and 4 by rotating the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu Spectrum Ehn is short for spectrum enhancement 4 27 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E AutoCalc Direction Used to specify the part of the spectrum to calculate when using AutoCalc Rotate the 5 dial button beneath the soft menu and select from Up Down and All TDW NOTE gt This can only be used when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe P For more information on TDW see TDW Mode Pressing the soft menu s dial button 6 switches the mode to TDW mode TDW
132. e handled by a Samsung Medison service technician or an authorized dealer WARNING Do not dispose of the battery pack carelessly In particular incinerating the battery pack may an uncontrolled fire or an explosion 8 9 MySonoU6 Operation Manual ee Data Management CAUTION You may lose information files on user settings or patients because of physical shocks to the product or internal errors Therefore you should back up information on a regular basis User Settings Backup Always keep a backup copy of all information related to the user settings in case of data loss Clients cannot back up the user settings of the product Please contact Samsung Medison s service department to attain support for backup However clients can back up user settings of the GA table used in OB measurements For a more detailed description see Chapter 7 Utilities and specifically the Obstetrics section Patient Information Backup The SONOVIEW program can be used for backing up patients basic information and scanned images The data is saved in the system by default and the user can also choose to save the data to a specific location If the system needs to be reinstalled because of product failure etc the Samsung Medison service department staff will restore the basic information and scanned images that are saved in the system Fora more detailed description see Chapter 6 Image Management and specifically the Saving and
133. e into the needle guide for use Insert the needle until it reaches the examination site To keep the needle securely in the needle guide press down on the top of the biopsy adapter with your index finger 6 When the examination location is reached take the needle out of the needle guide 7 Detach the needle guide adapter and sheath from the probe 8 Discard all disposable items following use Needle Guide Alignment Alignment of the needle guide displayed on the system is for the purpose of verifying whether the needle and the needle guide are properly installed This must be done prior to the biopsy examination If the needle does not follow the correct path when needle guide alignment is performed contact Samsung Medisons5 service department for servicing Reverberation or other tissue artifacts may produce false needle images which can cause confusion Ensure the needle path is along the guideline and that you are not using a false needle image to locate the needle WARNING P The needle used for this alignment verification must not be used for the actual procedure Always use a new sterile needle for each biopsy procedure P To assist in accurate projection of the needle use a straight new needle for each alignment procedure 1 Attach the biopsy kit 2 Set the system depth for the procedure to be performed and select the Biopsy menu 3 Immerse the probe into the water bath and insert the needle into the
134. e screen gt V1 Velocity at point 1 gt Time Change in time gt V2 Velocity at point 2 gt Acc Acceleration P PGmax Max Pressure Gradient gt RI Resistivity Index gt V2 V1 Change in speed gt S D Systolic to Diastolic Ratio The equations used for D Velocity measurement are as follows et V gt dV V V V V Kee EE n dT NOTE If Application under Utility gt Measure Setup gt General gt Caliper is set to Cardiac results for Vmax PGmax V2 V1 Time Acc etc are shown on the screen 5 13 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual D A B This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler Mode You can specify two points in a Spectral Doppler image and measure the velocity at each point to calculate the ratio of the velocity between them 1 Press Caliper and select D A B under soft menu 1 D A B is displayed in the user information area 2 Specify two points for which to measure velocity gt Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button 3 When the measurement is finished its result is Shown on the screen gt V1 Velocity at point 1 P PGmax Max Pressure Gradient gt V2 Velocity at point 2 gt V1 V2 Velocity ratio NOTE If Application under Utility gt Measure Setup gt General gt Caliper is set to Cardiac results for Vmax PGmax V2 V1 etc are shown on the screen D Trace This is a basic measurement that i
135. e state Contour Trace and Peak Trace will not little or no noise in an image without a spectrum Contour Trace will not work severe noise in an image Contour Trace will not work ter filter is set too high Auto Trace or Limited Trace may not work Causes for Inaccurate Peak Trace se Repetition Frequency is lower than the velocity in the observation area aliasing r If the original signals are separated from any aliasing the Trace can be carried out but the peak measurement may not be accurate of a spectral waveform is not clear or occurs intermittently the Trace can be carried out but the peak measurement may not be accurate f the doppler gain is set to high or low it becomes difficult to distinguish spectrums This may esult in measurement error s f the Wall Filter is set too high only part of the spectrum is displayed In this case the Trace can be carried out but Peak measurement may not be accurate f abnormal noise or artifacts occurs the Trace can be carried out but Peak measurement may not be accurate work gt If there is gt If there is P Ifthe Clu P If PRF Pu may occu P Ifthe pea r gt gt Other P Use of the CW Probe may result in measurement error s gt Limited Trace is supported only for two peak spectrums such as Mitral Valve Inflow and Tricuspid Valve Inflow in the cardiology application E Limited Trace If you specify a measurement range a spect
136. e type vascularity and mode of operation The TI should be used as a guide for implementing the ALARA principle The bone thermal index TIb informs the user about potential heating at or near the focus after the ultrasound beam has passed through soft tissue or fluid for example at or near second or third trimester fetal bone The cranial bone thermal index Tlc informs the user about the potential heating of bone at or near the surface for example cranial bone The soft tissue thermal index Tls informs the user about the potential for heating within soft homogeneous tissue Tic is displayed when you select a trans cranial application E Mechanical and Thermal Indices Display Precision and Accuracy 122 The Mechanical and Thermal Indices on the system are precise to 0 1 units The MI and TI display accuracy estimates for the system are given in the Acoustic Output Tables manual These accuracy estimates are based on the variability range of probes and systems inherent acoustic output modeling errors and measurement variability as described below The displayed values should be interpreted as relative information to help the system operator achieve the ALARA principle through prudent use of the system The values should not be interpreted as actual physical values investigated tissue or organs The initial data that is used to support the output display is derived from laboratory measurements based on the AIUM measurement standard The
137. easure predetermined items For information on configuring these measurements refer to the Auto Calc section in Chapter 7 Utilities Item Type Unit Equation PSV Peak Systolic Velocity Velocity cm s or m s EDV End Diastolic Velocity Velocity cm s or m s TAMV Time Average Mean Velocity Velocity cm s or m s TAPV Time Average Peak Velocity Velocity cm s or m s PGmean Mean Pressure Gradient Calculation mmHg PGmax Max Pressure Gradient Calculation mmHg 4 x PSV S D Ratio of PSV to EDV Calculation Ratio PSV EDV D S Ratio of EDV to PSV Calculation Ratio EDV PSV RI Resistivity Index Calculation Ratio PSV EDV PSV PI Pulsatility Index Calculation Ratio PSV EDV TAPV 5 27 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Volume Flow Measurement Select Volume Flow in the measurement menu Volume Flow allows you to measure and calculate an area or distance For information on distance or area measurements please refer to Basic Measurements The TAMV Time Avg Mean Velocity value is automatically measured E Vesl Area Vessel Area Measure the area of a blood vessel and calculate TAMV and Volume Flow VolumeFlow A Areax TAMV x60 E Vesl Dist Vessel Distance Measure the width of a blood vessel and calculate TAMV and Volume Flow d TX4 XTAMV x60 VolumeFlow D Stenosis Measurement You can measure the stenosis of each blood vessel system by measuring and calculating an area or dista
138. ecting to the DICOM Modality Work list server in the hospital network NOTE A work list search is available only when DICOM is enabled The Work list Server can be specified at Utility gt Setup gt DICOM Refer to the Setting DC OM section of Chapter 7 Utilities 1 Select Worklist under Search Source 2 After entering at least one item out of Patient ID Last Name Accession work list number and Procedure ID click Search The list of patients who match the criteria will be displayed Clicking items such as Date Time or Patient Name sorts entries into alphabetical or numerical order for the selected criteria 3 Select a patient list and tap on the Apply button This applies the selected patient information to the system 3 21 ES MySonoU6 Operation Manual Search Source Worklist Patient ID Last Name Accession Procedure ID Date Time Patient Name Patient ID Accession Procedure ID Description E Search Apply Figure 3 13 Search Worklist 322 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Managing Patient Exams In the Patient Information screen select the Exam View tab A list of exams performed on the patient whose ID was entered under Search is displayed NOTE The exam list is only displayed after a patient information search has been performed and the patient information has been loaded onto the system In addition to patient ID name age and gender the exam list contains the following inform
139. ed exam will be marked on the list in yellow The saved image will also be displayed on screen ID 2011 08 04 0001 U6 Eh 0 selected Name Doe Jane COMPARE DiAbdomenf enen Ei Eet 42011 08 04 07 17 36 PM 06dBFAB P90 9 08 PIA 0 kHz2 000941 00 mm Continue Exam Close All Close Layout Image Scroll Figure 6 7 Exam Mode 6 19 UG Compare Mode Click Compare in the upper left corner of the screen The button will appear in yellow Compare mode is used to compare images during an exam ID 2011 08 04 0001 U6 Name Doe Jane 1 selected OcrniGen MIO SOITISO 7 2041 06 04 07 17 24 PM ibdomenfFPS 11017 Qcm Gen MIO 63IT1s0 4 2011 08 04 07 11 36 PM BP 2011 08 04 0 Close All Close LE D ay fs ig fa Layout Thumb Scroll Figure 6 8 Compare Mode Compare Mode Screen As in Exam Mode exams for each ID appear on the screen In addition images for the selected exam are displayed in a thumbnail format Thumb Scroll The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the thumbnail list Use the soft menu s dial button 3 Thumb Scroll Rotating the dial button to the left displays the previous page s images in the thumbnail list Rotating it to the right displays the next page s images in the thumbnail list 620 Chapter 6 Image Management Select an image Use the trackball and the Set button to select an image from the thumbnail list The selected image is highlighted in yellow i
140. ed pulse intensity integral 3 296 21 to 2496 Wo acoustic power 6 296 19 Pr 3 derated rarefaction pressure 5 4 15 Fc center frequency lt 1 4 5 E Systematic Uncertainties For the pulse intensity integral derated rarefaction pressure Pr 3 center frequency and pulse duration the analysis includes considerations of the effects on accuracy of Hydrophone calibration drift or errors Hydrophone Amp frequency response Spatial averaging Alignment errors Voltage measurement accuracy including gt Oscilloscope vertical accuracy gt Oscilloscope offset accuracy gt Oscilloscope clock accuracy gt Oscilloscope Digitization rates gt Noise The systematic uncertainties Acoustic power measurements using a Radiation Force are measured through the use of calibrated NIST acoustic power sources We also refer to a September 1993 analysis done by a working group of the IEC technical committee 87 and prepared by K Beissner as a first supplement to IEC publication 1161 1 30 Chapter 1 Safety The document includes analysis and discussion of the sources of error measurement effects due to Balance system calibration Absorbing or reflecting target suspension mechanisms Linearity of the balance system Extrapolation to the moment of switching the ultrasonic transducer compensation for ringing and thermal drift Target imperfections Absorbing reflecting target ge
141. ed with the Set button when the Freeze function is in effect E Changing the menu Press the Active Mode button on the control panel This changes the menu and the soft menu without affecting the active image mode The functions of the buttons on the control panel vary depending on the active image mode For example pressing the Active Mode button while in 2D C PW mode with the 2D mode soft menu loaded on the screen loads up Color Doppler mode soft menu N NOTE For information on optimizing an image in Combined Mode please refer to Basic Mode 4 36 Diagnosis Modes Dual Mode Press the keyboard s Dual button This lets you compare images from two different diagnosis modes or combined mode Each time you press the Dual button one of the two images is activated The active image is identified with an orange line Control panel and soft menu operation depends on which diagnosis mode has been activated To exit from Dual mode press the keyboard s Single button FR 50Hz 16 0cm MI 1 1 2011 10 21 Cardiac P2 4 Res Tis 0 9 02 52 34 PM G50 118dB FA2 P90 G50 118dB FA2 P90 ES 2 Frame Avg 2 Dynamic Range 118 Reject Level 14 Edge Enhance 1 Focus Frequency Harmonic M Line oft Write Zoom 2DiC Live Figure 4 9 Dual mode Change Window The active image is changed on each press of soft menu s dial button The image that is currently being scanned is displayed with a yellow outline at the top 4 37 M
142. edison s ultrasound products do not generate electromagnetic interference in excess of their standard levels of the devices An Ultrasound System is designed to receive signals at radio frequency and is therefore susceptible to interference generated by RF energy sources Examples of other sources of interference are medical devices information technology products and radio and television transmission towers Tracing the source of radiated interference can be a difficult task Customers should consider the following in an attempt to locate the source P Is the interference intermittent or constant gt Does the interference show up only with one transducer operating at the same frequency or with several transducers gt Do two different transducers operating at the same frequency have the same problem gt Is the interference present if the system is moved to a different location in the facility The answers to these questions will help determine if the problem resides with the system or the scanning environment Answer each of the questions and contact the Samsung Medison service department in your area 1 15 WO MySonoUG Operation Manual es Mechanical Safety Safety Notes CAUTION P Do not apply excessive force to the product gt Install and use the product at a stable location Use of the Samsung Medison cart sold separately is recommended P Do not use the product with it placed on your lap You might get bur
143. eiGalcuilationseesseentte ne 5 42 arotidiCalculatiOnszeeeerte reet eI 5 55 UE Artery Calc latiohs cmo reser e UE E 5 61 WEE EE 5 63 HE let 5 65 le lege WEI 5 67 e lee see RS 5 69 eet VR UE EH 5 73 Abdomen Calculations see 5 76 SiialliPantsi alculationsemesste seen 5 79 TEDiGaletlationses eee ERE EE 5 84 Musculoskeletal Calculations 5 86 Pediatric Hips Calculations ss 5 87 Report EN 5 89 MieWiligiRepOLEs eerte meet eR EE 5 89 Editing dE 5 91 Adding Gomimehtse ccc cocco A 5 93 EHM 5 95 ExportingiReDpOLES eere teer E 5 94 Been d en Ce 5 95 Oe Dr 5 95 Ree ie usse eee dete 5 100 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations es Measurement Accuracy Measurement values can vary depending on the nature of the ultrasound the body s response to ultrasound the measurement tools algorithms product settings probe type and user operation Before using this product make sure to read and understand the following information regarding the causes of measurement errors and measurement optimization Causes of Measurement Errors Image Resolution The resolution of ultrasound images may be limited by the available hard disk space gt Errors due to signal range may be minimized by adjusting focus settings Optimizing the focus settings increases the resolution of the measured data P In general lateral resolution is lower than axial resolution Therefore measurements
144. emical substances or gases 83 MySonoU6 Operation Manual es System Maintenance SCH NOTE The expected service life of this product is 7 years Cleaning and disinfecting Using an inappropriate cleaning or sterilizing agent may damage the product Bear the following information in mind WARNING P Turn off the system and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before cleaning and disinfecting otherwise there is a risk of electric shock or fire P Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting the product Cleaning CAUTION P Do not spray cleaning agents directly onto the product s exterior Doing so may discolor or damage the product P Do not use chemical substances such as wax benzene alcohol paint thinner insecticide aerosol deodorant lubricant and detergent E Console Use a soft cloth lightly dampened with a mild soap or detergent solution to clean the exterior surfaces of the system E Cleaning Monitor Wipe the LCD surface with a soft dry cloth When the LCD panel has dirt on it wipe it two to three times or more in one direction NOTE For information on cleaning and disinfecting the probe and the biopsy kit please refer to Chapter 9 Probes 84 Disinfecting Chapter 8 Maintenance N CAUTION Use only the recommended disinfectants on system surfaces A disinfectant qualified by the FDA 510 k process is recommended The following disinfecta
145. en further Soft Menu Use The soft menu consists of the most commonly used options and functions for each diagnosis mode These options and functions can be selected and executed by using the corresponding soft menu dial buttons If the soft menu spans over more than a single page rotate the Ext Menu dial button to scroll through the pages 45 UG wi Basic Mode 2D Mode This basic mode also referred to as B Mode Brightness mode provides scan planes of organs This is used to display two dimensional anatomy images in the direction of scanning in real time FR 32Hz 13 0cm MI 0 54 2011 10 21 Abdomen C2 8 Gen Tis 0 3 02 41 57 PM G50 120dB FA9 P90 Frame Avg 9 Dynamic Range 120 Reject Level 9 EdgeEnhance 0 Focus Frequency Harmonic M Line Oft Write Zoom 2DiC Live Figure 4 1 2D Mode Entering 2D Mode Press the 2D button on the control panel If you press the 2D button in other diagnosis modes it will switch to the basic 2D Mode SCH NOTE Because 2D Mode is applied by default for all diagnosis modes it cannot be terminated 46 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes 2D Mode Soft Menu The soft menu in 2D mode consists of the following SCH NOTE The soft menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility gt Menu Edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 Frame Avg Dynamic Range Reject Level Edge Enhance Focus DMR Index Frequency Harmonic M Line Write Zoom 2
146. ended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter Recommended separation distance d 2217 Vi 3 5 d WP E1 80MHz to 800MHZ p d WP E1 800MHz to 2 5GHz Radiated RF 3 V m 3V m Where P is the maximum output power rating IEC 61000 4 3 80 MHz of the transmitter in watts W according to to 2 5GHz the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in meters m Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters as determined by an electromagnetic site survey a should be less than the compliance level in each frequency range Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol o NOTE 1 At 80MHz and 800MHz the higher frequency range applies NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures objects and people a Field strengths from fixed transmitters such as base stations for radio cellular cordless telephones and land mobile radios amateur radio AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters an electromagnetic site survey should be considered If the measured field strength in the location in which the Ultrasound System is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above the Ult
147. ent as the POWER control is adjusted however other system controls will affect the on screen output values E Power Power controls the system s acoustic output Two real time output values are on the screen a Tl and a MI They change as the system responds to POWER adjustments In combined modes such as simultaneous Color 2D mode and pulsed Doppler the individual modes each add to the total Tl One mode will be the dominant contributor to this total The displayed MI will be from the mode with the largest peak pressure 123 MySonoU6 Operation Manual 2D mode Controls E 2D mode size Narrowing the sector angle may increase the frame rate This will increase the TI Pulse voltage may be automatically adjusted down with software controls to keep the TI below the system maximums A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI E Zoom Increasing the zoom magnification may increase frame rate This will increase the Tl The number of focal zones may also increase automatically to improve resolution This action may change MI since the peak intensity can occur at a different depth Persistence A lower persistence will decrease the TI Pulse voltage may be automatically increased An increase in pulse voltage will increase MI E Focal no More focal zones may change both be land MI by changing frame rate or focal depth automatically Lower frame rates decrease the TI MI displayed will correspond to the zone with the largest
148. enu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace MPA Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Duct A Asc Aorta Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Dsc Aorta IVC PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s All PW Velocity cm s m s Duct Venosus S Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s PLI D Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s AVmax PW Velocity cm s m s MV E A PW Velocity MVE PW Velocity cm s m s MV MVA PW Velocity cm s m s MR Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s TVE A PW Velocity TVE PW Velocity cm s m s TV TVA PW Velocity cm s m s TR Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s 5 71 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All PW Calculation after continuous measurement Telides TST PW Time ms ET PW Time ms Fetal HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5 72 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Urology Calculations Before Taking Urology Measurements Set the related menus for convenient measurement You can select the volume method for measurement There are four types of volume method The factor value can be set manually for the formulae that need it Refer to the Setting Measurements section in Chapter 7 Utilities for additional information General Measurement Menu The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report Urology WG Prostate
149. enu in TDW mode consists of the following NOTE The soft menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility gt Menu Edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 Steer Speed Angle SV Size BaseLine Scale 10 Step Doppler Invert Angle AutoCalc Mean Trace PP 60 Step AutoCalc Loop Size Dynamic Range Spectrum Ehn Direction Power Frequency Doppler Avg Filter TDW SCH NOTE For more information on the soft menu refer to the PW Spectral Mode section 434 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes gt Combined Mode In Combined Mode three different modes are combined including the default 2D Mode Note that in 2D C Live Mode only two modes are combined 2D and Color Doppler Modes 2D C PW Mode Color Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously In Color Doppler Mode press the PW dial button on the control panel Or in PW Spectral Doppler Mode press the C button on the control panel 2D PD PW Mode Power Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously In Power Doppler Mode press the PW button on the control panel Or in PW Spectral Doppler Mode press the PD button on the control panel 2D C CW Mode Color Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously This mode is available only with certain probes In Color Doppler Mode press the CW dial button on the control panel Or in CW Spectral Doppler Mode press
150. enu tabs of the calculation package that was selected under Select Calc Package Selecting a menu tab places an orange border around it E Calc Menu Preview Displays the calculations that are currently available on the menu tab that was selected under Check Calc Click to display any sub measurement items E Available Menu List Displays all calculations that are supported by the selected calculation package Click to display the sub measurement items 7 60 Chapter 7 Utilities Configure the calculation menu as follows 1 Select an application under Select Calc Package 2 Select a menu tab under Check Calc Tabs A yellow border is placed around the selected menu tab The selected menu tab s content is shown in Calc Menu Preview 3 Configure the menu tab gt Changing Menu Tab Order Select a menu tab and change the order by using the e and z buttons to the right of the list gt Show Hide Menu Tab Select the check boxes of the menu tabs you wish to use You must select at least one menu tab gt New Menu Tab To create a copy of the selected menu tab click Copy To create a new menu tab click New gt Rename Menu Tab Click Rename gt Delete Menu Tab click Delete gt Factory Restores factory default settings 4 Configure calculations gt Changing Calculation Order Use the Ej E buttons on the right gt Add Calculation Select a calculation from Available Menu List and click gt Delete C
151. erence and area of the desired area Measurement methods are identical to those described in Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations 3 Click the measurement icon once more 624 Chapter 6 Image Management Typing Text Click the Text Annotation icon Kon the screen You can enter text into an image 1 Place the cursor over an image and press the Set button The image will be resized to its original size 2 Position the cursor on the desired area and enter text gt Soft Menu Dial Button 4 Color Change the font color gt Soft Menu Dial Button 5 Size Change the font size 3 Press the Set button to confirm the text To exit from text input mode press the icon once more Printing Image 1 Click the Print Image icon ES on the screen The Image Print window will appear 2 Configure the setup and comment options 3 Click the Print button to print the image Click Close to cancel Orientation Layout Format Patient Info Options Figure 6 10 Image Print 6 25 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Transferring Images via DICOM This product allows you to transfer selected images via DICOM The icon is enabled only when an image s is selected The icon is disabled in a system where DICOM is not enabled 1 After selecting an image press the Send Image to DICOM Storage icon LB on the screen The DICOM Storage window will appear 2 Press the Transfer button to transfer the selected image to the DICOM serve
152. ergy transmitted into the patient The sonographer must reconcile exposure time with diagnostic image quality To ensure diagnostic image quality and limit exposure time the ultrasound system provides controls that can be manipulated during the exam to optimize the results of the exam The ability of the user to abide by the ALARA principle is important Advances in diagnostic ultrasound not only in the technology but also in the applications of the technology have resulted in the need for more and better information to guide the user The output indices are designed to provide that important information There are a number of variables which affect the way in which the output display indices can be used to implement the ALARA principle These variables include mass body size location of the bone relative to the focal point attenuation in the body and ultrasound exposure time Exposure time is an especially useful variable because the user controls it The ability to limit the index values over time support the ALARA principle 1 18 Chapter 1 Safety Applying ALARA The system imaging mode used depends upon the information needed 2D mode and M mode imaging provide anatomical information while Doppler Power and Color imaging provide information about blood flow Scanned modes like 2D mode Power or Color disperse or scatter the ultrasonic energy over an area while unscanned modes like M mode or Doppler concentrate ultrasonic energy
153. ess this dial button to start stop M mode Press this dial button to start stop CW Spectral Doppler mode cw Butt Mut Available only with the phased array probe PW Button Press this dial button to start stop PW Spectral Doppler mode 2D Button Press this dial button to start 2D mode C Button Press this dial button to start stop Color Doppler mode PD Button Press this dial button to start stop Power Doppler mode 3D 4D Button Starts or ends 3D 4D mode In combined mode pressing this button changes the soft menu Each Active Mode Button press of the button changes the soft menu to the one that relates to the next diagnosis mode in the set gt Ext Menu Pressing the dial button changes the soft menu page Press the button while the measurement or utility menu is shown Ext Menu Ext Menu is short for External Menu Dial button Angle gt Angle Adjusts the angle of the sample volume in Spectral Doppler mode It is also used to adjust the BodyMarker s probe cursor or indicator angle Depth Button Adjusts the scanning depth of the image Focus Button You can adjust the focus point 2 10 Chapter 2 Introduction Zoom Button You can magnify an image Q Scan Pressing the dial button activates Quick Scan A mark appears at the top of the image It can be used only in specific applications of Q Scan Gain Dial button specific probes Gain Rotatin
154. ettings for each item 4 When you have finished press Exit 7 16 General Select the General tab on the Setup screen From this tab you can configure the general system settings Simultaneous Mode Off 6 Allow B PW Allow Bi ci Pw Freeze Action None Caliper EndExam Action EndExam Only Clip Store Method ECG Beat Time Scan Mode Dual Operation Auto Unfreeze 2DIC Live Left Option BodyMarker Auto Freeze HPRF Color Map Auto Invert Width Scale Measure EndExam Patient Clip Store Setting Cine Loop Period Retrospective Prospective Chapter 7 Utilities Manual Figure 7 11 Setup General Scan Mode E Simultaneous Mode You can decide whether to enable Simultaneous Mode in Spectral Doppler Mode using the following three options gt Off Select this if you do not wish to use Simultaneous Mode gt Allow B PW Select this if you do not wish to use Simultaneous Mode in 2D C PW Modes but do wish to use it in 2D PW Mode gt Allow B C PW Select this if you wish to use simultaneous mode for both 2D PW and for 2D C PW E Freeze Action Select a function to execute when the Freeze button on the control panel is pressed Available options are BodyMarker Caliper Measure and None 7 17 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E End Exam Action Used to assign a task to the control panel s End Exam button gt End Exam Only Pressing the End
155. ey is assigned to EFW Result clicking it displays the EFW calculation result on the screen If the key has not been assigned to this function press Calculator and check the result from the OB measurement menu Gynecology Calculations Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations NOTE P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 Before Taking GYN Measurements Enter the information required for GYN diagnosis in the Patient Information window Basic Information for gynecology includes Gravida Para Aborta Ovul Date Day of Cycle and Ectopic General Measurement Menu The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report General Gynecology Uterus gt Uterine Tumor 1 Cervical Tumor gt Rt Lt gt Rt gt Rt Lt Lt gt Rt Lt Uterine A Uterine A Ovary Ovarian Mass Ovary Ovarian Mass Follicles Follicles gt Endometrial gt Cyst gt Pericystic Figure 5 5 General GYN Measurement Menu 5 39 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Method Unit Calculation after Distance Uterus All ml Measurement Uterus L Distance cm mm Uterus H Distance cm mm Uterus W Distance cm mm
156. ference that are parallel to the original line and displays the oblique image gt Click Multi Parallel and draw the reference line by using the trackball and the Set button Parallel lines will be inserted automatically gt To adjust the gap between the parallel lines use the soft menu s dial button 3 Slice Thickness Multi Plumb Once the user draws a straight line this option applies four lines on the reference that are perpendicular to the original line and displays the oblique image gt Click Multi Plumb and draw the reference line by using the trackball and the Set button Perpendicular lines will be inserted automatically gt To adjust the gap between the parallel lines use the soft menu s dial button 3 Slice Thickness a NOTE For more information on Palette and Post Processing refer to the 3D View MPR Mode section 4 66 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Accuracy eere 5 3 Causes of Measurement Errors eene 523 Optimization of Measurement Accuracy 5 5 Measurement Accuracy Lable eren 5 7 Basic Measurements eee 5 8 Distance Measurement A 5 11 Measurement of Circumference and Area 5 16 Volume Measurement EEN 5 18 Calculations by Application 5 21 TUCE ONIE e 5 21 Common Measurement Methods EE 5 25 ER le HE 5 30 Gynecology Calculations Aa e 5 39 Gardid
157. fetal measurement ranking is desired and SD can be used when the distance between actual fetal measurements and the average measurement is sought While the range of Growth table references that are primarily used with OB measurement data varies depending on the user the typical range accepted by most users is as below 1 When references are created based on SD P 2 0 SD 2 0 SD when converted to Percentile 2 28 97 72 Percentile gt 1 5 SD 1 5 SD when converted to Percentile 6 68 93 32 Percentile P 1 0SD 1 0 SD when converted to Percentile 15 87 Percentile 84 13 Percentile 2 When references are created based on Percentile P 2 5 97 5 Percentile when converted to SD 1 96 SD 1 96 SD P 5 0 95 0 Percentile when converted to SD 1 645 SD 1 645 SD P 10 0 Percentile 90 0 Percentile when converted to SD 1 288 SD 1 288 SD 5 99 EE MySonoU6 Operation Manual Closing Reports Click the OK button on the Ultrasound Report screen or press the Exit or Report buttons on the control panel The screen will switch to the Diagnosis Mode screen that was displayed before loading the report 5 100 Image Management Iul GIN C E OOD E 6 3 DE Vote det d EE 6 6 Ee EE 6 6 Die E L E DRE 6 10 lee eur EUM 6 12 Saving and Playing Images 6 14 SAVING IMAG ee 6 14 PLAYING lat Le LEE 6 15 Transferring and Printing Images 6 16 TESTEN EE 6 16 IE
158. fety 4 Collateral Standard Programmable Electrical Medical Systems IEC 60601 1 4 1996 A1 1999 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 2 Particular Requirements for Safety 37 Ultrasonic Medical Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment IEC60601 2 37 2001 with A1 2004 A2 2005 gt Medical Devices Application of Risk Management to Medical Devices ISO 14971 2007 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Safety UL60601 1 2003 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Safety CAN CSA 22 2 No 601 1 M90 1990 with R2003 with R2005 gt Biological Evaluation of Medical Devices IS010993 2009 gt Standard Means for the Reporting of the Acoustic Output of Medical Diagnostic Ultrasonic Equipment IEC61157 2007 E Declarations S P This is CSA symbol for Canada and United States of America C US This is manufacturer s declaration of product compliance with applicable EEC 0 1 23 directive s and the European notified body This is manufacturer s declaration of product compliance with applicable EEC directive s This is GMP symbol for Good Manufacturing Practice of Korea quality system regulation vi Before Using This Product You should be familiar with all of these areas before attempting to use this manual or your ultrasound system E Please keep this user guide close to the product as a reference when using the system E Chapter 1 Safety and Chapter 8 M
159. g SRF on by pressing the dial button displays mark on the right side of the screen and creates the SRF Index option in the soft menu E SRF Index This option only appears in the soft menu when SRF is turned on Two predefined indexes are available Select between 1 and 2 by rotating the 6 dial button beneath the soft menu E Ext Res Press the soft menu dial button to turn Ext Res on or off When turned on this function increases the number of channels and consequently the resolution However the frame rate decreases in this case Ext Res is an abbreviated form of extended resolution E Scan Area Used to specify the image width Set to a value between 4096 and 10096 by pressing the soft menu s dial button Increasing the image width reduces the frame rate E 2D Image Size Used to specify 2D image size Set to a value between 80 and 100 by rotating the soft menu s dial button E FSI Synthesizes the images using data measured at different frequencies in 2D mode Shallow observation depths yield higher resolution and deep observation depths yield higher penetration Select between 1 and 3 by rotating the soft menu s dial button FSI is an acronym for Full Spectrum Imaging E Gray Map Changes the Gray Map Set to a value between 1 and 13 by rotating the soft menu s dial button 411 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Post Curve This changes the 2D Post Curve Set to a value between 1 and 9 by rotating the soft menu s dia
160. g the dial button adjusts the gain under the current diagnosis mode p A Button Exits the currently used function and returns to the previous function Exit R Button When this is pressed an arrow marker appears to point to parts of the Pointer displayed image gZ Button Deletes text indicator BodyMarker measurement result etc from the Clear image FREE Button This is used to change the current trackball function Change ruil Button Starts measurements by application Calculator Button Starts to measure distance circumference area and volume Caliper o Button Select an item or value using the trackball Set ES Button Pauses resumes scanning Freeze Button Saves the displayed image or report to the database Save Prints an image on the screen using the printer connected to the Button system The function of this button can be set in Utility gt Setup gt User Print 1 Defined Key Trackball Trackball Moves the cursor on the screen Also scrolls through Cine images TGC Slider Allows you to adjust TGC values for each depth by using 6 sliders TGC stands for Time Gain Compensation N stripes in an image CAUTION Too great a difference in the gain value settings of adjacent TGC sliders may cause MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Soft Menu Executes the function assigned to the relevant number in the Soft Menu e current soft menu The menu options that are displayed change Dial button 1 6 depending on the status
161. ge enhancement value Set to a value between 3 and 3 by rotating the 6 dial button beneath the soft menu Higher values provide more accurate images of boundaries E Anatomical M Gei NOTE Available only with the phased array probe or the cardiac application Pressthe soft menu s dial button 6 to turn Anatomical M on or off Once turned on you can change the M line length Use the Change button to reposition M Point 1 and M Point 2 a NOTE For more information on other soft menu options and functions refer to the 2D Mode section 4 15 UG Color Doppler Mode This mode displays the colored blood flow pattern of the ROI Region of Interest within the 2D image It is appropriate for examining the presence of blood flow its average speed and its direction The 2D Mode image is also shown allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the entire image FR 18Hz 13 0cm MI 0 84 2011 10 21 Abdomen C2 8 Gen Tis 0 5 02 42 56 PM G50 120dB FA9 P90 G45 2 50kHz FA6 F1 10 ka Frame Avg 6 Color Map 8 Sensitivity 10 Balance Color Invert Off Harmonic M Line Off Write Zoom 2DiC Live Figure 4 3 Color Doppler Mode Starting amp Ending C Mode Press the C button on the control panel to enter C mode Press the C button again to exit C mode and return to 2D mode 416 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes C Mode Screen E ROI Box ROI stands for Region of Interest The ROI Box outlines the area of the 2D image where color
162. gure 4 4 Power Doppler Mode 420 Starting amp Ending PD Mode Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes Press the PD button on the control panel to enter PD mode Press the button again PD Mode will be terminated and the mode switched to 2D PD Mode Screen E Color Bar In PD mode the color bar displayed varies depending on the Power Doppler mode display method that is in use gt PD Mode The color bar indicates the presence of blood flow and its amount The area above the baseline is the brightest section where the amount of blood flow is at its highest gt DPDI Mode The color bar indicates the strength and direction of blood flow Based on the Baseline at the middle red indicates the strength and direction of blood flow toward the probe By contrast the blue color indicates the strength and direction of blood flow away from the probe E ROI Box The ROI Region of Interest outlines the area of the 2D image where color blood flow information is displayed in Power Doppler Mode PD Mode Soft Menu A The soft menu in PD mode consists of the following NOTE The soft menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility gt Menu Edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 Steer Frame Avg Color Map Sensitivity Balance Scale Color Invert Harmonic M Line Write Zoom 2D C Live Color Format PD Mode Line Density Baseline Power Frequency Filter 421 _ MySonoU6 Operation Ma
163. h by a measurement line Start Point of Measurement Set a location indicated by the cursor Set a start point for measurement gt End Point of the Last The cursor appears at the end point of the last measurement gt Start Point of the Last The cursor appears at the start point of the last measurement P Center of the Region The cursor appears in the center of the image region 7 58 Chapter 7 Utilities Display Specify items to display during measurement Check the checkboxes of the items you wish to use E Show Measured Value in Menu This gives you the option of either showing measured values on the measurement menu or hiding them E Guideline gt Displays the Doppler guideline Sets whether the cross line will be displayed or not when measuring various items in the frozen state spectrum This function is useful in estimating the value roughly gt Displays the M Mode guideline Sets whether the cross line will be displayed or not when measuring various items in the frozen state of the M mode This function is useful in estimating the value roughly E Clear Function on UnFreeze gt Clear Measured 2D Mode Results On UnFreeze Specify whether to clear measurement results from the screen when switching to Scan Mode after performing measurements in 2D Mode P Clear Measured M D Mode Results On UnFreeze Sets whether the screen measurement result will be deleted or not when switching to the scan mode after perform
164. h increases the number of scan lines and improves the image resolution However the frame rate decreases in this case E Trapezoidal N NOTE Trapezoidal appears in the menu only when a linear probe is used Press the soft menu s dial button 3 to turn this option on or off In general the rectangular frame provided by a linear probe is changed to a trapezoidal frame when this option is turned on This allows a wider view of an image The Trapezoidal function may not be available for certain depths In addition the Zoom button cannot be used while the Trapezoidal function is being used E Pulse Inversion Press the soft menu s dial button 4 to turn Pulse Inversion on or off If it is turned on pulses are inverted to sharpen the displayed image ZN NOTE Pulse Inversion is only available with specific probes E Power Used to adjust the ultrasound output Rotate the soft menu s dial button 5 and set to a value between 10 and 100 E Tissue Optimizes the image by selecting the ideal frequency and speed settings for the type of tissue being scanned Rotate the soft menu s dial button 5 and choose from Solid Normal Adipose and Cystic 4 10 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes E SRF SRF is an acronym for Speckle Reduction Filter Lei NOTE SRF is not available if DMR is turned on Press the soft menu dial button 6 to optimize an image by minimizing noise and adjusting the brightness of boundaries automatically Turnin
165. he Customer shall keep confidential all proprietary information furnished or disclosed to the Customer by Samsung Medison unless such information has become part of the public domain through no fault of the Customer The Customer shall not use such proprietary information without the prior written consent of Samsung Medison for any purpose other than the maintenance repair or operation of the goods Samsung Medison s systems contain Samsung Medison s proprietary software in machine readable form Samsung Medison retains all its rights title and interest in the software except that purchase of this product includes a license to use the machine readable software contained in it The Customer shall not Copy trace disassemble or modify the software Transfer of this product by the Customer shall constitute a transfer of this license that shall not be otherwise transferable Upon cancellation or termination of this contract or return of the goods for reasons other than repair or modification the Customer shall return to Samsung Medison all such proprietary information es Safety Requirements E Classifications gt Type of protection against electrical shock Class gt Degree of protection against electrical shock Patient connection Type BF equipment gt Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water Ordinary equipment gt Degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable anesthetic material with air or with oxygen or n
166. he curve to Type1 through 5 or User1 through 3 You can edit user type curves by using the menu s Edit option S Monitor Calibration Figure 7 6 Monitor Calibration 7 11 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Gamma Select Gamma from the post curve menu Use the Ext Menu dial button to adjust the brightness and contrast levels Select Off Weak Medium or Hard Weak makes the screen brighter and Hard makes it darker 2D Post Select 2D Post from the post curve menu 2D Post Figure 7 7 2D Post Post Curve Select a post curve Use the Ext Menu dial button to select from 1 through 9 Chroma Map Press the Ext Menu dial button to turn the chroma map on or off When turned on the colors of the image displayed on the screen can be changed to meet individual preferences Chroma Map Used to configure the chroma map Use the Ext Menu dial button to select from Type 1 through 13 or User 1 through 3 Selecting a user type activates the Chroma Edit option on the 2D post menu 72 Chapter 7 Utilities Chroma Edit Used to customize chroma colors To adjust the colors use the soft menu s dial buttons 2 3 and 4 You can select a value between 0 and 255 Return Returns to the previous step of the current menu after the current Post Map setting has been completed 7 13 SSI MySonoU6 Operation Manual Color Map Select Color Map from the post curve menu Color Map Figure 7
167. he date and time when the job was created Status Displays the current status of the job 7 50 Chapter 7 Utilities Status Description Fail The job failed Transfer The job is in progress Job suspended while being processed The status will be switched to the Ready state mperfect immediately Wait The job is waiting for execution Wait Resp The job is waiting for a response Hold The job is waiting for a retry This occurs when the job has failed but the maximum retry count has not yet been reached Ready The job is waiting for execution This occurs when the network is not connected The Ready state is not complete This occurs when MPPS Modality Performed Not Ready Procedure Step End occurs before MPPS Start has been completed Or when a Storage or Print batch job has not completed E Network Status Displays the network connection status When connected Connected is displayed When disconnected Disconnected is displayed E Number of Jobs Displays the number of jobs listed in the DICOM Job Status screen E Log Displays the DICOM Log window E Retry Performs the selected job again This button is enabled only when the status of the selected job is Fail or Wait Resp E Retry All Retries all jobs for which the status is Fail E Delete Deletes the selected job This button is enabled only when the status of the selected job is Fail Imperfect Wait Resp or Not Ready
168. he object and the length of the straight line are calculated The equations used for 1 Distance measurement are as follows 3 Vol H D distance 3 2 Dist Ellipse This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes You can measure the volume of an object in a 2D image by using one straight line and one circle ellipse 1 Press Caliper and select Dist Ellipse under soft menu 3 Distance Ellipse is shown in the user information area 2 You can specify two points and measure the straight distance between them The measurement method is identical to Distance 3 Specify the size of the circle ellipse The measurement method is identical to Ellipse 4 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen gt D The length of a straight line Area The area of a circle gt Long The length of the long axis in an ellipse gt Vol Volume gt Short The length of the short axis in an ellipse The equations used for Distance Ellipse measurement are as follows Vol 7 xaxbxd a Short axis b Long axis d Distance 5 19 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Ellipse This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes In a 2D image the volume of a conical object is measured by using an ellipse 1 Press Caliper and select Ellipse under soft menu 3 Ellipse is shown in the user information area 2 Specify the size of the circle ellip
169. ich you can use to rename the current userset 74 Chapter 7 Utilities vi Biopsy Select Biopsy from the utility menu Z8 NOTE The biopsy option is not available with the phased array probe Editing the Biopsy Guideline Before using the biopsy option you must specify the biopsy guideline This is to ensure accurate results NOTE gt Note that the biopsy guideline cannot be edited when the Trapezoidal function is in use for the Linear Probe gt Ifthe system is rebooted the biopsy guideline settings are restored to the default 1 Press the soft menu s dial button 2 A warning message appears 2 Select OK to bring up the guideline configuration screen 3 Set the biopsy guideline by using the trackball and the Set button 4 Press the soft menu s dial button 3 Save to save the settings A confirmation message appears gt If you wish to reconfigure the settings press the soft menu s dial button 2 Edit 5 Select OK to apply the new biopsy guideline Click Cancel to cancel saving 7 5 UG Starting and Finishing a Biopsy N NOTE Make sure to adjust the biopsy guideline before using the biopsy feature 1 Press the soft menu s dial button 1 Biopsy On Off A warning message will appear 2 Click OK and the biopsy guideline will appear on the screen If the guideline shown on the screen is not correct press the soft menu s dial button 2 to change it 3 Insert a needle along the guideline And the
170. ile cabinets computer equipment and even other individuals CAUTION P The level of electrical energy discharged from a system user or patient to an ultrasound system can be significant enough to cause damage to the system or probes P Always perform the ESD preventive procedure before using connectors bearing the ESD warning symbol Apply anti static spray on carpets or linoleum Useanti static mats Ground the product to the patient s table or bed P It is highly recommended that the user be given training on ESD related warning symbols and preventive procedures Chapter 1 Safety EMI Although this system has been manufactured in compliance with existing EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference requirements use of this system in the presence of an electromagnetic field can cause degradation of the ultrasound image or product damage If this occurs often Samsung Medison suggests a review of the environment in which the system is being used to identify possible sources of radiated emissions These emissions could be from other electrical devices used within the same room or an adjacent room Communication devices such as cellular phones and pagers can cause these emissions The existence of radios TVs or microwave transmission equipment nearby can also cause interference N CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause equipment damage EMC The testing for EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility of th
171. ill wait before it retries when transmission fails You can specify this time period in seconds E Maximum Retries Specify how many times the system will retry when transmission fails 7 40 Chapter 7 Utilities Storage Server Information Select STORAGE under Services Configure the Image Storage Service using DICOM Services STORAGE Alias IP Address AE Title Port No 494 Transfer Mode Retry Interval 30 Connect Timeout Maximum Retries 1 Storage Options VOI LUT Setup Send Cine Loops Window Center Include Pixel Spacing Window Width Include SD Volume Cancel Figure 7 24 DICOM Configuration Storage E Storage Options gt Send Cine Loops Check this checkbox to send Cine Loops gt Include Pixel Spacing In addition to the area information used in ultrasonography the area information used in CT or radiography is also included Measurements can be taken from a PACS system that does not support ultrasonic area information NOTE However only 2D and 2D Color Mode images are supported In Dual and Quad Mode the depths of the included images must be identical I P Include 3D Volume Select whether to send 3D volume data together with the 3D images NOTE Only select this option if you use a storage service that supports the 3D volume data format used by Samsung Medison 7 41 7 42 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E VOI LUT Setup Configure VOI LUT Value Of Interest Look Up Table
172. implied including warranties of merchant ability or fitness for any particular use No representative or other person is authorized to represent or assume for Samsung Medison any warranty liability beyond that set forth herein Defective equipment shipped from you to Samsung Medison must be packed in the replacement cartons Shipping and insurance costs are the responsibility of the customer To return defective material to Samsung Medison contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service Department Samsung Medison or a local distributor will make available upon request circuit diagrams a component parts list descriptions calibration instructions and other information which will assist your appropriately qualified technical personnel to repair those parts of the equipment which are designed by Samsung Medison as repairable CAUTION United State federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of physicians XE samsunc MEDISON MANUFACTURER SAMSUNG MEDISON CO LTD 42 Teheran ro 108 gil Gangnam gu Seoul Korea Customer Service Department SAMSUNG MEDISON CO LTD TEL 82 2 2194 1234 FAX 82 2 2194 1071 Website www samsungmedison com EC Representative SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS UK LTD Blackbushe Business Park Saxony Way Yateley Hampshire GU46 6GG UK MySonoU6 Diagnostic Ultrasound System Operation Manual Version 1 00 00 English M359 E10000 01 PROPRIETRAY INFORMATION AND SOFTWARE LICENSE T
173. ine A Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm Fetal HR M PW Heart Rate bpm AFl Amniotic Fluid Index Measure the amniotic fluid index Measurements are performed by dividing the pregnant woman s abdomen into four parts The distance between the fetus and the farthest point of each area is measured To obtain a specific image from each quadrant plane press the Freeze button to go to the diagnosis mode After obtaining the image press the Freeze button again to return to the measurement mode 5 36 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Calculating Estimated Fetal Weight EFW When measurements for the following items are complete the system usesthe results to automatically calculate the estimated fetal weight For an equation for calculating fetal weight please refer to Estimated Fetal Weight Formula in the Reference Manual Part 1 gt BPD AC gt AC FL gt BPD FL FTA gt BPD AC FL gt BPD APTD TTD FL gt HC AC FL gt BPD APTD TTD SL gt BPD HC AC FL gt BPD TTD P AC Continuous Measurement for EFW Calculation You can measure OB item s continuously for EFW calculation Before starting measurement P Assigning the User key to EFW Measure makes taking the measurement much easier Assign the key from Utility gt Setup gt User Defined key gt User Key Setup For more information refer to the User Defined Keys section in Chapter 7 Utilities
174. ing Of ecc ETE 3 4 Wie Monitorand Audio E 3 5 Monitor Brightness Adjustment 525 Volume AdjUsttmellts coc EE 3 5 m Probes amp Applications 3 6 Probe CONNECHOM eene A tle Ie S RAE E 3 7 Application Selections EE 3 8 Changing Probe Presetic e ed 3 8 il Patient Information emet 3 9 Basic Patient Information Entry 3 9 Application Specific Patient Information 3 11 Searching for Patient Information 3 20 Kleer 3229 Changing Measurements mmer 3 30 m Power Saving Mode 3 33 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis es Power Supply Boot up the system for use powering on the system If you attempt to connect them during system use it may lead to patient i CAUTION Make sure to connect the probes and peripheral devices that will be used before injury or irreparable damage to the console 7 NOTE Samsung Medison recommends that you use an AC power source whenever possible AC Adapter Connection Use the power port located on the rear of the product Connecting the AC adapter automatically begins to recharge the battery pack WARNING Before connecting the AC adapter make sure it s the right way up Forcing the adapter into the product in the wrong way can damage the product NOTE P If powering the product with a battery pack do not connect the AC adapter P For more information on battery pack replacemen
175. ing measurements in M mode and Doppler mode E Measurement Unit Specify the measurement units For a small object it is more convenient to use mm for Dist When blood flow is fast it is better to use m s for Vel gt Dist Select either a cm or mm scale for the unit of distance area and volume gt Vel Selects the units of velocity cm s or m s NOTE All the result values which have been measured up to now will be deleted if the measurement units are changed 7 59 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Measurement Results gt Transparent BK color Sets a transparent background gt Number of Results Displayed Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen This is applied to the basic measurement results for all applications except for obstetrics cardiac vascular urology and fetal heart NOTE Use the setting tab of each application to set the Number of Measure Results Displayed for Obstetrics cardiac vascular urology and fetal heart Calc Menu Select the sub tab Calc Menu under the General tab From this tab you can customize the calculation menu NOTE P You can create up to 4 new menu tabs P Default tab menus cannot be deleted or changed The Calc Menu Designer screen consists of the following B Select Calc Package Calculation packages are shown in the dropdown list Select the calculation package that you wish to edit E Check Calc Tabs Displays the m
176. ings Select Measure Setup from the utility menu Specify various setup options for measurements The setup may be modified depending on specific needs or preferences 1 Select Measure Setup from the utility menu 2 When the Measure Setup screen appears select the tab that contains the setting you wish to configure 3 Specify settings for each item 4 Press Close or Exit to finish Selecting a tab You can select a desired tab in either one of two ways Select the method that suits you P Use the trackball and the Set button to select a tab P Use the Ext Menu dial button or Page to select a tab 7 56 Chapter 7 Utilities General Select the General tab on the Measure Setup screen You can specify basic measurement options General Select the sub tab General under the General tab You can specify basic measurement options Cursor amp Method Display Line Marker Type Cross Hair Show Measured Value in Menu Circ and Area Method Ellipse Guideline Display the Doppler Guideline Apply Auto Resizing Line Marker Display the M Mode Guideline Line Type Clear Function on UnFreeze Dotted Line Clear Measure 2D Mode Result On UnFreeze Clear Measure M D Mode Result On UnFreeze Hidden Dotted Line Measurement Unit Hidden Dotted Line after SET Dist Vel Start Point of Measurement Measurement Results End Point of the Last Start Point of the Last Transparent BK color Numb f Results Dis
177. ion If the image information appears intrusive disable this option to hide it gt TI Thermal Index Display Specify the TI to display on the screen as Tls Soft tissue Thermal Index Tlb Bone Thermal Index or Tlc Cranial bone Thermal Index E Doppler Axis Select the units of measurement for the axis scale in Spectral Doppler Mode gt Velocity Specify the Doppler axis scale unit as cm s m s gt Frequency Specify the Doppler axis scale unit as kHz E LMP GA EDD Display 7 20 Specify how the LMP GA and EDD entered in the Patient Information screen will be displayed on the monitor screen Select two from LMP GA and EDD gt Information Bar Replace ID Replace the ID in the title area gt Information Bar Replace Name Show the patient name in the title area gt Information Bar Replace App Show the application in the title area gt Measure Result Display the measurement result along with the selected LMP GA or EDD gt None None of the options are displayed on the screen Font E Font Chapter 7 Utilities Specify the target for which you want to set the font Choose from Document Font and Measure Result Font E Font Name Select the font type to use E Font Size Select the font size to use E Font Color Select the font color to use E Preview Previews the font selection E Default Uses the system s default fonts The default settings are as follows
178. is not connected 7 35 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual gt Unregistered The software license has not been registered yet gt Installed Hardware is installed but cannot be used yet P Permanent The hardware or software can be used for an unlimited period P Restricted The hardware or software can be used only for a certain period of time P Expired Use of the software is restricted and it cannot be used because the specified period of use has expired HW Configuration The list of optional hardware will appear Currently only ECG is supported Select a hardware item to use by using the checkbox Reboot the system to complete the settings Chapter 7 Utilities DICOM Select the DICOM tab on the Setup screen Used to configure DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine operation and server NOTE P DICOM is an optional feature in this product P For more information please refer to the server s user manual or the DICOM Conformance Statement DICOM Configuration AETitle Set AETitle Station Name Set Station Name PortNo 404 Service Name Alias AE Title IP Address Port Ping Add Edit Delete Test DICOM Send Format DICOM Compression 2D Mode Color Still Image Uncompressed Color Mode Color Store SR at End of Exam Figure 7 23 Setup DICOM DICOM Configuration Information about the DICOM server used by the system is displayed You can change the information or add
179. is system has been performed according to the international standard for EMC with medical devices IEC60601 1 2 In Europe the IEC standard was adopted as the European norm EN60601 1 2 Guidance and manufacturer s declaration electromagnetic emission This product is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below The user is to ensure that the product is used in the following environment Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment guidance The Ultrasound System uses RF energy only for its internal RF Emission functions Therefore its RF emissions are very low and are Group 1 e CISPR 11 not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment PE Class B ISPR 11 The Ultrasound System is suitable for use in all 8 Uu establishments including domestic establishments and Harmonic Emission i Class A those directly connected to the public low voltage power IEC 61000 3 2 S e supply network that supplies building used for domestic Flicker Emission Complies purposes IEC 61000 3 3 P MySonoU6 Operation Manual Approved Cables Transducers and Accessories for EMC E Approved Cable for Electromagnetic Compliance Cables used with this product can affect the emission levels Accordingly only use cables of the types and lengths specified below Cable Type Length DVI Shielded Normal USB Shielded Normal LAN RJ45 Twisted pair
180. itrous oxide Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide gt Mode of operation Continuous operation E Electromechanical safety standards met gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential Performance IEC 60601 1 2005 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 2 General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential Performance Collateral Standard Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements and Tests IEC 60601 1 2 2007 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 6 General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential Performance Collateral Standard Usability IEC 60601 1 6 2006 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 2 37 Particular Requirements for the Basic Safety and Essential Performance of Ultrasonic Medical Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment IEC60601 2 37 2007 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Safety IEC 60601 1 1988 with A1 1991 and A2 1995 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Safety 1 Collateral Standard safety Requirement for Medical Electrical Systems IEC 60601 1 1 2000 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Safety 2 Collateral Standard Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements and Test IEC 60601 1 2 2001 A1 2004 gt Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1 General Requirements for Sa
181. l button E Spatial Compound NOTE P Spatial Compound is an optional feature of this product 412 gt This item only appears in the menu when a Linear Probe is used P Spatial Compound is not available if Ext Res is turned on Press the soft menu dial button to turn Spatial Compound on or off A mark is displayed on the right side of the screen if Spatial Compound is turned on Diagnosis Modes M Mode The M Mode is used to specify an observation area in a 2D image with the M Line and display changes over time This mode is appropriate for the observation of organs with a lot of movement such as cardiac valves The 2D Mode image is also shown allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area within the entire image FR 29Hz 13 0cm MI 0 54 2011 10 21 Abdomen C2 8 Gen Tis 0 4 02 42 23 PM G50 116dB FAS P90 E Display Format 5 5 Speed az 0 M Edge Enhance 0 Negative Chroma Map Figure 4 2 M Mode 4 13 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Starting amp Ending M Mode Press the M button on the control panel Press this button again M Mode will be terminated and the mode switched to 2D M Mode Screen E M Line Use the trackball on the control panel to move the line to the right or left The M Line indicates the relative position of the M Mode image in the 2D image Therefore you can move the M Line to change the observation area M Mode Soft Menu NOTE The soft
182. l panel s Exit button or the soft menu s dial button 6 Repositioning BodyMarker 1 Press the Change button on the control panel 2 Move the BodyMarker to a desired position by using the trackball 3 Press the Change button again to confirm the new position Deleting BodyMarker Press the Clear button on the control panel Ending BodyMarker Input Mode Press the soft menu s dial button 6 Exit Or press the Exit button on the control panel 611 UG Indicator You can place an Indicator over an image This function can be useful when the diagnosis area is differentiated or displayed Up to 50 indicators can be entered 2011 10 23 0001 FR 32Hz 13 0cm MI 0 54 2011 10 23 Doe Jane 23y0m Abdomen C2 8 Gen Tis 0 3 09 38 49 AM G50 120dB FA9 P90 Erase Last Indicator Figure 6 6 Indicator Input Mode Starting Indicator Input Mode Press the Indicator key on the keyboard This activates the indicator input mode Entering Indicators 1 Pressing the keyboard s Indicator key brings up the indicator on the screen 2 Move the Indicator to the desired position by using the Trackball 3 Use the control panel s Angle dial to adjust the indicator s direction 4 Press the Set button to finish Press Exit to cancel 6 12 Chapter 6 Image Management Deleting Indicators When you press the Clear button on the control panel all indicators entered on the screen are cleared If you only want to delete the
183. last indicator that you entered press the soft menu s dial button 1 Erase Last Indicator 6 13 MySonoU6 Operation Manual es Saving and Playing Images Saving Images WARNING You must always enter the patient ID because all images are saved according to patient ID Failure to enter a patient ID may result in a loss of and or critical errors in previously saved images The saved images are displayed in the thumbnail area The saved images can be edited and managed with SONOVIEW Saving Still Images Press the Save button on the control panel Saving Multi Frame Images N NOTE In Dual Mode only Cine in the active area is saved Depending on the current state Freeze or Live multi frame images can be saved in two ways E Freeze State Use the trackball or the soft menu s dial button 6 CINE Save to define the range of images that you wish to save Refer to the Cine Loop in this chapter E Live Mode Save images by using the User1 button on the control panel or the foot switch s Store Clip function Store Clip Settings To change Store Clip settings go to Utility Setup General Store Clip Setting To set up the Store Clip function go to Utility gt Setup gt User Defined Key gt User Key Setup gt User Key gt User 1 or Utility gt Setup gt User Defined Key gt Foot Switch For a more detailed description refer to Chapter 7 Utilities 6 14 Chapter 6 Image Management Pl
184. lation formulae please refer to the reference manual Cardiac Measurement Result E Measurement Result Type Used to specify the measurement result type Select Avg Last Max or Min value Number of Measure Results Displayed Number of Results Displayed Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen 7 14 Chapter 7 Utilities Type of Derived Calc Results Displayed Used to specify the measurement result display method Select Brief for a brief display and Detailed for a detailed display Cursor amp Method Circ and Area Method Trace LY Volume Method Teichholz Cardiac Measurement Result Measurement Result Type Avg Number of Measure Results Displayed Number of Results Displayed 16 bk Type of Derived Calcs Results Displayed E Figure 7 45 Cardiac Setup 7 15 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Vascular Select the Vascular tab on the Measure Setup screen You can specify settings for vascular measurement AJB Ratio Doppler Results A E Subclavian PSV Subclavian PSV Bulb PSY Bulb PSV ECAPSV ECAPSV Vertebral PSV Vertebral PSV Subclavian EDV Subclavian EDV Bulb EDV Bulb EDV ECAEDV ECA EDV Vertebral EDV Vertebral EDV ICAICCA Ratio ICA CCA Prox PSV Prox PSV Mid PSV Mid PSV Distal PSV Distal PSV Prox EDV Prox EDV Mid EDV Mid EDV Distal EDV Distal EDV Vascular Measurement Result Number of
185. ld therefore remove the battery pack from the product or connect the product to an AC power source when it is not in use gt For more information on battery pack replacement and maintenance refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance 2 18 Battery Icons Chapter 2 Introduction Battery icons indicate the status of the battery pack and are shown in the user information area of the screen While using the battery pack as the power source use the battery icons to check the remaining battery level See below for more information on battery icons Icon Status Remarks Connected to an AC power source Battery pack is being recharged Battery level is between 75 and 100 Battery level is between 50 and 75 Battery level is between 25 and 50 Battery level is below 25 AC adapter is not connected Indicates that neither the AC adapter nor the battery pack is connected or there is a battery related error 2 19 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Probes Probes are devices that generate ultrasound waves and process reflected wave data for the purpose of image formation SCH NOTE For more information on probes refer to Chapter 9 Probes and the reference manual Be sure to connect or disconnect probes when the power is off to ensure the safety of the system and the probes 1 Lift up the probe s lockdown switch and disconnect the probe 2 Connect the probe to the pr
186. le the biopsy kit into its component parts if applicable Discard the single use parts These parts cannot be disinfected 3 Using a small brush and water scrub each part to remove trapped material from the reusable components 4 Rinse with water to remove remaining particulates E Disinfection CAUTION P Plastic biopsy kits can only be disinfected by using a chemically compatible P cold disinfectant Disinfection by autoclaving or by using gas or radiation will cause P damage to these parts Please refer to the user instructions of the disinfectant for instructions on the storage use and disposal of the disinfectant 1 Check the disinfection duration generally 10 hours and temperature of the disinfectant 2 After disinfection follow the proper post disinfection procedure for the disinfection method used 3 Inspect the components for damage such as cracks rust or breakage If damaged contact Samsung Medisons service department 9 24 Chapter 9 Probes Assembling the Biopsy Kit C2 5 Biopsy Guide Plastic E Biopsy Specifications Model name BP KIT 041 Biopsy Bracket 1EA Needle Guide 16G 6EA Component Needle Guide 18G 6 EA Needle Guide 20G 6EA Needle Guide 22G 6EA Material Acetal Copolymer Available Gauges 16G 18G 20G 22G E Installation 1 Mount the adapter onto the probe 2 Fill the sheath with the ultrasound gel and place the sheath all the way down
187. le to transfer data Select the XML format to transfer data with reporting tools such as Astraia Sonoultra and ViewPoint User Table Backup and Restore Used to back up a table created by the user or restore a previously backed up table onto the system Click BackUp or Restore and specify your desired options DICOM SR Format E General Report This is the default format E ViewPoint This is the ViewPoint data format 7 64 Caliper Select the Caliper sub tab under the General tab Chapter 7 Utilities Specify whether additional information will be shown along with the basic measurement values when basic measurements are taken by pressing the Caliper button If this option is selected the additional information will also be saved and output along with the measurement results If Application is set to Cardiac the D Velocity D A B D Trace items are changed NOTE The Cardiac setting can be used only when the probe preset is Cardiac or Pediatric Cardiology E Display Used to specify the number of lines to use for displaying measurement results on screen when basic measurements are taken in 2D M or D mode Number of 2D Results Displayed Number of M D Results Displayed Distance B Distance Trace Dist Ratio 2Dist Avg 2Dist Avg All Application General Cardiac M Distance Dist Time Slope B Ellipse Trace StD Area St Outer Dist AStA St Outer Area St Inner Area StA St Inner
188. lect the area 2 Press Depth and specify the depth of the cut You can select a depth between 1 and 100 3 Press Apply to finish To cancel or start over use the soft menu s Undo Undo All and Redo commands Undo Cancels the cut Redo Reapplies the cut Undo All Cancels all cuts Palette Used to configure 2D 3D image colors Pressing this button brings up the Palette screen E 2D Palette Used to specify 2D image color Select a Palette from the options 0 to 9 by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu E 3D Palette Used to specify 3D image color Select a Palette from the options O to 9 by rotating the 2 dial button beneath the soft menu 4 57 UG 3D XI zx NOTE 3D Xl is an optional feature of this product This view mode is activated if View Mode was set to MSV or Oblique View in 3D Standby Alternatively you can select the MSV or Oblique View tabs from the view mode menu MSV Mode An image can be viewed in multiple slices Press the MSV tab from the view mode menu to bring up the MSV screen MSV is an abbreviation for Multi Slice View 80cm M046 2011 10 21 U6 Tls0 3 025856 PM Oblique Vi 33 0 mm nm 34 0 mm 345mm 36 0 mm 7213 3 1 37 0 mm 2D i Slice Thickness 0 5m Selected Slice 66 Page Change 6 74 Rotate X Rotate Y Rotate Z Orientation Dot On Init Next Page Figure 4 16 Multi Slice View MSV Screen Images sliced by the thickness set in Slice Thickne
189. led only after Auto or Limited Trace is carried out in Spectral Doppler Mode gt Up Only the part of the doppler waveform is traced gt Down Only the part of the doppler waveform is traced gt All All parts of the doppler waveform are traced E Tab Select a measurement package by rotating the 2 dial button beneath the soft menu Each press of the button changes the menu tab within the current application E Threshold Set by rotating the soft menu s 3 dial button This is enabled only after Auto or Limited Trace is carried out in Spectral Doppler Mode Adjusting the threshold facilitates contouring of the doppler spectrum B Laterality Select whether you want to measure the left Lt or Right Rt side of an object by pressing the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu This option appears on the menu only with certain applications 5 23 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Result Action Set a location for a measurement result by rotating the 4 dial button beneath the soft menu gt Move Change the display position of the measurement results Change the position with the trackball and then press the Set button gt Reset When you press the dial button the display position of the measurement results is reset Tips gt When there are multiple pages of measurement results you can find the desired result by click the Move button E Delete Activated while tracingis in progress Rotating the soft menu
190. lication frame rate depth probe information acoustic output information and date and time Image Area This is where the ultrasound image is displayed Image information annotation and measurement information are also displayed 2 7 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Thumbnail Area Up to five saved images are displayed Save by pressing the Save button Click a thumbnail to enlarge In BodyMarker mode the BodyMarkers are displayed E User Information Area The user information area provides a variety of information necessary for system use Information such as current system status image information selectable items etc are displayed Current System Status Shows the Foot Switch connection status Displays the battery level For more information refer to the Battery Pack section in this chapter Displays the network status Displays USB device connection status Double click on the icon to load the Storage Manager screen Shows the system s total hard disk space and the available disk space Shows the wireless LAN connection status E Soft Menu The menu options that are displayed change depending on the status of the system To add or remove a soft menu option press the corresponding dial button on the control panel Screen Brightness Adjustment Use the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard However you cannot adjust the screen brightness in text mode 2 8 Chapter 2 Introduction Co
191. lick the Save button on the screen Click Cancel to cancel Volume Data 1 If volume data contains a Cine image it is saved at the same time 2 If images are saved with volume data they can be converted to new 3D rendering images with Sonoview Save Type Volume Format 7 Image Volume Default Select Item Figure 4 12 3D Data Save E Printing Image Press the Print 1 or Print 2 button on the control panel 4 45 MySonoU6 Operation Manual MPR Mode Soft Menu E Mix Set the combination of Render Mode 1 and 2 Rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 to set the mix value to a value between 0 and 100 For more information on render modes refer to the Render Setup section SCH NOTE Mix is only available with 2D 3D ROI 3D and Fixed 3D modes E Init Press the soft menu dial button 1 This restores the acquired 3D image to its original state and settings E Th Low Use the soft menu s dial button 2 and set Th Low to a value between 0 and 254 Threshold This option allows you to adjust the threshold value in order to eliminate unnecessary data from images As the number increases cyst elements become more apparent As the number decreases bone elements become more apparent N NOTE Th Low is only available with 2D 3D ROI 3D and Fixed 3D E Full Press the soft menus dial button 2 Pressing this button displays the 3D image in full screen mode When you press this button again the displ
192. lities E Eject Remove Disconnects the selected drive NOTE Before unplugging a USB Flash memory drive make sure to disconnect it by using the Eject Remove button E Format Initializes the selected drive Under the Format window you can initialize various settings Click Start to start initialization Click Close to cancel formatting This is an error in Windows and does not mean that the currently inserted media NOTE In the case of DVD RW or DVD RW its free space can be displayed as O bytes after cannot be used 7 83 MySonoU6 Operation Manual gt Menu Edit Select Menu Edit from the utility menu The Menu Edit screen will appear From this screen you can configure the soft menu layout for each mode Menu Edit Screen The Menu Edit screen consists of the following U6 C Mode PD Mode TDIMode PW Mode CW Mode TDW Mode M E 1 Freeze Menu Item 2D Image Size E Angle 10 Steps Chroma Map DMR Index Dynamic Range Edge Enhance 2 Focus Frame Avg Frame Rate FSI Gray Map Line Density Post Curve Power Page 1 Frame Avg Dynamic Range Reject Level Line Density Edge Enhance Focus DMR Index 1 Frequency Harmonic M Line Write Zoom 2D C Live DMR Page 2 Rotation Frame Rate Tissue SRF Index 1 LR Flip UM Flip Trapezoidal d Figure 7 50 Menu Edit Pulse Inversion SRF Mode Select 2Dh Default Setting User Presets Mode Tab Configurable modes are dis
193. locity cm s m s Fetal HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5332 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Automatic Calculation Some items in the measurement menu are automatically calculated based on measurements of other items E HC This is automatically calculated using the following formula provided there are measured BPD and OFD values HC zx4 BPD OFD 2 2 2 Exception when you use Merz reference HC 2 325 4 BPD OFD E AC This is automatically calculated using the following formula provided there are measured APD and TAD values AC zx APD TAD 2 Exception when you use Merz reference AC 2 zx APD TAD 2 E FTA This is automatically calculated using the following formula provided there are measured APD and TAD values FTA x x APDXxTAD 4 5 33 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E MAD This is automatically calculated using the following formula provided there are measured APD and TAD values MAD APD TAD 2 E Thc This is automatically calculated using the following formula provided there are measured APTD andTTD values ThC x4 APTD TTD 2 E APTDxTTD This is automatically calculated provided there are measured APTD and TTD values NOTE For reference the Osaka University Tokyo University methods are mainly used in Asia the Merz method in Europe and the Shepard Hadlock methods on the American continent Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations General Mea
194. m System Maintenance eere 8 4 Cleaning and disinfecting socer cancun 8 4 Accuracy Check s eee RE NU EIE 8 6 Battery Pack Management 8 7 Replacing the Battery Pack 8 7 Recharging the Battery Eat 8 8 Storing the Battery Pack o secuestro 8 9 Disposing of the Battery Pack aaa 8 9 i Data Management eere 8 10 User sSettingsBackup s a 8 10 Patient Information Backup EE 8 10 SOR Wale Nee e TRENT RES 8 10 Chapter 8 Maintenance es Operating Environment When installing this product please pay attention to the following CAUTION P Placing the system near generators X ray machines or broadcast cables may result in screen noise and abnormal visual images Sharing the power source with other electrical devices may also cause noise gt If powering the system with an AC source make sure to use a designated adapter only Gei NOTE AC adapter use is recommended to ensure a steady power supply E Avoid excess humidity E Avoid exposing the product to direct sunlight E Avoid exposing the product to extreme changes of temperature E Optimal conditions for the system are temperatures of 10 35 C and humidity of 30 75 H Avoid installing the product near heating equipment H Avoid installing the product in a dusty and or poorly ventilated location E Avoid locations with frequent vibrations H Avoid exposing the product to ch
195. m s m s General StA All Calculation after area measurement Calculation after distance StD All measurement Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm E Sum of 20 Disks After measuring the circumference of a prostate use the trackball and the Set button to calculate the volume by measuring the axis of the prostate 5 5 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Abdomen Calculations The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P Itis convenient to calculate each measurement value on the spectral doppler image P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter General Measurement Menu Abd Vascular Abdomen Liver gt Gallbladder gt Pancreas gt Spleen Bowel Kidney Figure 5 20 General Abdomen Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All All Calculation after distance ml Liver measurement Spleen L All Distance cm mm Rt Kidney Lt Kidney H All Distance cm mm W All Distance cm mm GBD All Distance cm mm Wall All Distance cm mm Calculation after distance All All ml Gallbladder measurement L All Distance cm mm H All Distance cm mm W All Distance cm mm 5 6 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
196. measurements are then put into algorithms to calculate the displayed output values Many of the assumptions used in the process of measurement and calculation are conservative in nature Over estimation of actual in situ exposure for the vast majority of tissue paths is built into the measurement and calculation process For example the measured water tank values are de rated using a conservative industry standard attenuation coefficient of 0 3dB cm MHz Conservative values for tissue characteristics were selected for use in the TI models Conservative Chapter 1 Safety values for tissue or bone absorption rates blood perfusion rates blood heat capacity and tissue thermal conductivity were selected Steady state temperature rise is assumed in the industry standard TI models and the assumption is made that the ultrasound probe is held steady in one position long enough for a steady state to be reached A number of factors are considered when estimating the accuracy of display values hardware variations algorithm accuracy estimation measurement variability and variability among probes and systems are significant factors Probe variability results from piezoelectric crystal efficiencies process related impedance differences and sensitive lens focusing parameter variations Differences in the system pulse voltage control and efficiencies are also a contributor to variability There are inherent uncertainties in the algorithms used for e
197. memory 2 17 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Battery Pack This product uses lithium ion batteries Use this battery pack if you are not using an AC adapter to power the product or the power supply is not reliable WARNING P If the low battery message appears while using the product save the diagnosis information right away and connect the AC adapter as soon as you can If you continue to use the product without connecting it to an AC power source it will display a warning message and automatically shut down gt Ifthe AC power source is not reliable or the product has not been grounded properly then you should use the battery pack P MySono U6 has specific battery pack and AC adapter requirements Always use a battery pack recommended by Samsung Medison The number of hours the battery pack can power MySono U6 for varies depending on the diagnosis mode selection and the types of peripherals being used If the battery level runs low while using the product connect it to an AC power source to recharge the battery pack If you have a spare battery pack and want to replace the depleted battery pack shut down the system before making the replacement NOTE P 4D mode can only be used when connected to an AC power source P Before using the battery pack make sure to read the battery safety information in Chapter 1 Safety gt The battery pack will continue to discharge even after powering off the product You shou
198. ments can be increased when the display format is set to high values Doppler Mode gt It is recommended to use lower frequency ultrasound for measurement of faster blood flows gt The size of the sample volume is limited by the axial direction of the ultrasound gt Using lower frequency ultrasound increases penetration gt The accuracy of time measurements can be increased when the sweep velocity is increased gt The accuracy of velocity measurements can be increased when the vertical scale is set to smaller values gt It is most important to use an optimal Doppler angle to enhance the accuracy of velocity measurements 55 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Color Power Doppler Mode gt A protocol is not specified for images in Color Doppler Mode or Power Doppler Mode Therefore the same limitations imposed when measurements are taken in B W images apply to the accuracy of the measurements taken in these modes gt Itisnotrecommended to use images in Color Power Doppler Mode for measurement of accurate blood flow velocity gt The amount of blood flow is calculated based on the average velocity rather than the peak velocity gt In all applications the amount of blood flow is measured in PW CW Spectral Doppler Mode Cursor Position gt All measurements are affected by input data gt To ensure accurate positioning of the cursor Adjust the images on the screen so that they are displayed at maximum granularity
199. menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility gt Menu Edit The soft menu in M mode consists of the following 1 2 3 4 5 6 Display Format Speed Loop Size Chroma Map Type Power M Edge Enhance Negative Chroma Map Anatomical M E Display Format Used to configure M image and 2D image layout Rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 and choose between Top Bottom and Side By Side gt Top Bottom Places the M image on top of the 2D image gt Side By Side The 2D image is displayed on the left and the M image on the right E Speed Used to adjust the M image speed Select 60Hz 1 20Hz 180z 240Hz 300Hz or 360Hz by rotating the soft menu s dial button 2 4 14 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes E Negative Inverts the M Images colors Press the soft menu s dial button 2 to turn this function on or off E Loop Size Used to adjust the M images size Set to a value between 30 and 70 by rotating the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu E Chroma Map Press the soft menu s dial button 4 to turn this function on or off Once turned on rotate the soft menu s dial button 4 and set the image color to Type 1 through 13 or User 1 through 3 NOTE User types can be changed from Utility Post Curve M Post Chroma Map For more information refer to Chapter 7 Utilities and specifically the Post Curve section E M Edge Enhance Used to select the M image s ed
200. methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 1 Before Taking OB Measurements E OB Basic Information 5 30 Enter the information required for OB diagnosis in the Patient Information window The basic OB information includes LMP Last Menstrual Period and Gestations Once LMP is entered EDD Estimated Delivery Date and GA Gestational Age are calculated automatically LMP is required for the calculation of values such as EDD and SD in obstetrics measurement gt EDD LMP LMP 280days P GA LMP Current System Date LMP Regardless of LMP enter the EDD with a physician s opinion into Estab Due Date If LMP is not available when Estab Due Date is modified LMP is automatically calculated and the C mark is displayed next to the LMP information A maximum of four fetuses can be entered in the Gestations menu The default value is 1 In the case of twins enter 2 For further information about patient information menus and how to input patient information refer to the Patient Information Entry section in Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations E OB Measurement Menu Settings NOTE P Assigning OB measurements to the keyboard s function keys makes taking measurements much easier The function of each button can be set in Utility Setup User
201. mm 5 8 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Small Parts Calculations The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the spectral doppler image P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter Thyroid Measurement Menu Thyroid EDT Mass2 Mass3 aur Mass5 gt Thyroid Vol gt Thyroid Flow Figure 5 22 General Thyroid Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit Calculation after distance All All ml measurement Mass 1 5 L All Distance cm mm D All Distance cm mm W All Distance cm mm Calculation after distance All All ml measurement Thyroid Vol L All Distance cm mm H All Distance cm mm W All Distance cm mm 5 79 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace PSV PW Velocity cm s m s EDV PW Velocity cm s m s Thyroid Flow 96StA All Calculation after area measurement 96 StD All Calculation after distance measurement Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm Vel A PW Velocity cm s m s Vel B PW Velocity cm
202. mode with the largest derated intensity If a mode is turned off and then reselected the system will return to the previously selected settings E Probes Each probe model available has unique specifications for contact area beam shape and center frequency Settings are initialized when you select a probe Factory defaults vary according to the probe application and selected mode Defaults have been chosen below the FDA limits for intended use E Depth An increase in 2D mode depth will automatically decrease the 2D mode frame rate This would decrease the TI The system may also automatically choose a deeper 2D mode focal depth A change of focal depth may change the MI The MI displayed is that of the zone with the largest peak intensity E Application Acoustic output defaults are set when you select an application The factory defaults vary with probe application and mode Defaults have been chosen below the FDA limits for intended use Related Guidance Documents For more information about ultrasonic bioeffects and related topics refer to the following 1 AIUM Report January 28 1993 Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound 2 Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound J Ultrasound Med Sept 1998 Vol 7 No 9 Supplement 3 Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment AIUM NEMA 1998 4 Acoustic Output Labeling Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment AIUM 1
203. n Dot On Next Page Figure 4 17 Oblique View Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes Single Static Line Used to examine the sectional image at an angle perpendicular to the default line shown on the image Use the soft menus dial button 2 to rotate the default line Dynamic Line Used to examine the sectional image at an angle perpendicular to a line drawn by the user gt Draw a line by using the trackball and the Set button The starting point is marked with an S and the end point with an E gt To change the line s angle use the soft menu s dial button 2 Rotate Line Contour Used to examine the sectional image at an angle perpendicular to a line or curve contoured by the user Instructions for contouring moving and adjusting the line are the same as with Dynamic Line Multi Line Used to examine the sectional image at an angle perpendicular to a line drawn by the user Instructions for drawing moving and adjusting the lines are the same as with Dynamic Line NOTE With Multi Line and Multi Contour you can only draw two or more lines if Auto Increase has been turned on Multi Contour Used to examine the sectional image at an angle perpendicular to a line or curve contoured by the user Instructions for contouring moving and adjusting the line are the same as with Dynamic Line 4 65 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Multi Parallel Once the user draws a straight line this option applies four lines on the re
204. n Mo Distance Area Volume Move Figure 5 1 Basic Measurements Soft Menu B Selecting changing measurement method To select or change the measurement method you can use the soft menu s dial buttons 1 through 3 The soft menu items vary depending on the diagnosis mode being used The selected measurement method is displayed in the user information area B Setting the display position of the measurement results Use the soft menu s dial button 4 gt Move Change the display position of the measurement results Change the position of the measurement results with the trackball and then press the Set button gt Reset When you press the dial button the display position of the measurement results is reset NOTE When there are multiple pages of measurement results you can find the desired result by using Move E Canceling measurement results Use the 5 dial button on the soft menu gt Delete Deletes a part of the curve being traced N NOTE The Delete function can only be used for Line Trace Area Trace and MOD gt Undo Press the dial button to cancel the previous measurement and measure again NOTE Undo can only be used for 3 Distance and Distance Ellipse among the volume measurement items 5 9 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Delete Measurement Result Press the Clear button on the control panel This deletes the measurement result from the screen E Print Measurement Result Press the Print 1 o
205. n doivent tre en place quand le amp syst me est en marche C US Esc For use with adapter model PMP15 13 2 HR PROTEK POWER MADE IN KOREA 275 K B112B 7 Label 1 ID label Please keep this operation manual close to the product as a reference when using the system CAUTION Bewahren Sie bitte diese Bedienungsanleitung bei der Benutzung als Referenz in der Nahe des Gerates auf Veuillez conserver ce manuel comme r f rence a proximit du produit lors de l utilisation du syst me Do not remove the system s covers hazardous voltages are present inside The cabinet panels must be in place while the system is in use Offnen Sie das Ger t nicht Im Inneren gibt es lebensgefahrliche elektrische Spannungen Das Ger t darf nur vollst ndig und unge ffnet betrieben werden Ne pas enlever les panneaux de protection du syst me il y a de l lectricit l int rieur Ces panneaux de protection doivent tre en place quand le syst me est en marche 275 K A686B Man WARNING Label 2 Cautions found on the lower part of the product exterior Chapter 1 Safety vi Electrical Safety This equipment has been verified as a Class device with Type BF applied parts Prevention of Electric Shock A A WARNING P Electric shock may result if this system including all of its externally mounted recording and monitoring devices is not properly grounded P Never remove the c
206. n method U6 FR 25Hz 8 0cm MI 0 96 2011 10 21 3D4 9 Res Tis 0 3 02 53 31 PM G50 100dB FA9 P90 EES Scan Mode 4D View Mode MPR LoadPreset ult Scan Quality lle Scan Angle 70 Auto ROI Wu Figure 4 10 3D Standby 3D Standby Soft Menu Scan Mode Select the 3D mode you wish to use Select between 3D and 4D by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu View Mode Select a view mode to use after 3D images are acquired Select from MPR MSV and Oblique View by rotating the soft menu s dial button 2 For more information on the view modes refer to the 3D View MPR or 3D XI section 4 39 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Load Preset Select a preset for the 3D image Select Default or User1 through User5 by rotating the soft menu s dial button 3 For more information referto the preset information contained in the 3D View MPR Mode section E Scan Quality Set the 3D image quality Select from Low Medium High and Extreme by rotating the soft menu s dial button 5 gt Extreme Provides superior image quality Use for studying a highly detailed image gt High Provides higher 3D image capturing or rendering speed than Extreme setting at the expense of image quality gt Middle Provides better image capturing speed and lower image quality than High setting P Low Provides the highest 3D image capturing speed and the lowest image quality E Auto ROI SCH NOTE Auto ROI only appears in the me
207. n of 15 E Rotate Axis Used to specify the rotation axis of the image Rotate the soft menu s dial button 3 and select between X and Y E Start Angle Used to set the start angle of a Cine image Rotate the soft menu s dial button 4 and set to a value between 180 and 1 When Start Angle is set Rotation Angle is cancelled End Angle Used to set the end angle of a Cine image Rotate the soft menu s dial button 5 and set to a value between 1 and 180 Configuring End Angle cancels the Rotation Angle setting E Mix Used to specify the rendering mix Set to a value between 0 and 100 by rotating the 6 dial button beneath the soft menu 4 50 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes E Calculate Press the soft menu dial button 6 Cine images are generated by applying the current settings Once generated the 3D Cine screen is shown 3D Cine Specify the settings needed for review of a Cine image E Play Mode Used to specify the 3D Cine playback method Select between Loop and Yoyo by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu gt Loop Repeats playback in one direction gt Yoyo Plays until the end in one direction and then plays in the reverse direction E Speed 96 Set the speed at which Cine images are played Set to 25 50 100 200 300 or 40096 by rotating the soft menu s dial button 2 E Cine Frame Used to select a specific Cine image for viewing Select a frame by rotating the soft menu
208. n perform the biopsy as desired 4 When you have finished the biopsy press the soft menus dial button 1 Biopsy On Off again The biopsy is complete FR 32Hz 13 0cm MI 0 48 2011 10 23 Abdomen C2 8 Res Tis 0 3 09 42 34 AM G50 120dB FA9 P90 Biopsy On Off Figure 7 3 Biopsy 7 6 Utilities es Histogram A histogram is a type of graph representing the distribution of echoes 1 Select Histogram from the utility menu 2 Specify an area that the histogram is to cover Use the trackball and the Set button to select the area 3 The histogram is shown on the left side of the screen FR 32Hz 13 0cm MI 0 48 2011 10 23 Abdomen C2 8 Res Tis 0 3 09 44 37 AM G50 120dB FA9 P90 EE Histogram Type Rec Move Hist Figure 7 4 Histogram 7 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual Histogram Settings You can specify the position of the histogram and the type of histogram that you want to use E Move Hist Press the soft menu s dial button 1 and then change the position of histogram by using the trackball Press Set to move the histogram to its new position E Histogram Type Rotate the soft menu s dial button 6 and select the histogram type Select either Ellipse or Rectangle 7 8 Chapter 7 Utilities wi Post Curve Select Post Curve from the utility menu Here you can set various post maps and gamma values Post Curve Figure 7 5 Post Curve Monitor Calibration Select M
209. n relief lens and seal for damage and check for any functional problem after cleaning and disinfecting the probe Information of Detergent Disinfectant and Ultrasound Gel An appropriate detergent disinfectant or ultrasound gel should be selected based on the following tables All probes are tested under IPX 7 Criteria LN5 12 ele 7 P2 4 e e EVN4 9 siele 3DC2 6 3D4 9 CW2 0 siele 9 12 C2 5 Chapter 9 Probes C2 8 C4 9 LN5 12 P2 4 EVN4 9 3DC2 6 3D4 9 CW2 0 Be MySonoUG Operation Manual 9 14 C2 5 Chapter 9 Probes C2 8 C4 9 LN5 12 P2 4 EVN4 9 3DC2 6 3D4 9 CW2 0 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Symbols Legend 1 Compatible but no EPA Registration 2 FDA 510 k qualified 3 Has CE mark 4 Discontinued 5 Under Development S Spray Ww Wipe L Liquid P Powder G Gel x Not compatible DO NOT USE Compatible D Staining may occur on housing parts however the acoustic performance and image quality are not affected Must not be used for longer than 5 minutes Must not be used for longer than 10 minutes Must not be used for longer than 15 minutes Must no
210. n s OK button or pressing the control panel s Exit button saves the comment and closes the editing screen If you wish to close the edit screen without saving changes tap Cancel Printing Reports Select the Ultrasound Report screen s Print button The button is only activated if there is a printer connected to the system Peripherals Print Setup Measure Report Print For more information refer to Chapter 7 NOTE Measurement report printing settings can be configured under Utility gt Setup gt Utilities and particularly the Peripherals section 5 93 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Exporting Reports Select the Ultrasound Report screen s Write to file button This saves the report as a file NOTE This button is only activated if Utility gt Measure Setup gt General gt Data Transfer gt Measurement Data is set to Write to file Once the Write to file window appears specify the directory drive file name and file format Click OK on the screen to save the report Click Cancel to cancel Drive D File Name 2011 08 04 0001 08 08 1 Mi File Format YML Format D Figure 5 32 Export Report SCH NOTE To remove a USB storage device from the system go to Utility Storage Manager 5 04 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Transferring Reports Click the Ultrasound Report screen s Transfer button This transfers report data via the RS232C cable The button is activated upon measurement completi
211. n screen s application list 1 Use the trackball and the Set button to select an application 2 Press OK dial button Click Cancel to cancel Changing the application by using the soft menu Press Utility The current probe preset is shown on soft menu 1 Rotate the dial until the desired application is shown To apply the new application selection press the dial button Changing Probe Preset Change the probe preset from the Probe Selection screen s preset or userset list The optimal preset for the probe and the selected application is loaded by default However the user can choose to change the preset 1 Use the trackball and the Set button to select a probe preset P Each preset can have several usersets user 1 user 2 Available usersets are shown underneath the preset Userset Selecting a userset displays the preset name in the title area For example setting Cardiac as the application and the User1 as the preset displays Cardiac User in the title area 2 Press OK dial button Click Cancel to cancel Changing the probe preset by using the soft menu Click Utility The current probe presets are shown on soft menu 2 and 3 Rotate the dial until the desired preset is shown To apply the new preset selections press Pre Load 7 NOTE For instructions on renaming a probe userset refer to Chapter 7 Utilities 3 8 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis sf Patient Information Press the Patient key on the co
212. n the list Select a location on the screen where the image will be displayed and then the selected image will appear Exam Image Management Use the icons on the screen or the soft menu dial buttons There are numerous functions available for assessing images Reviewing the current exam Press Current Exam on the screen The current exam and its images are displayed on the screen Reviewing the Most Recent Exam Press Continue Exam on the screen Exams that were performed within the last 24 hours and their images are displayed The initial exam date Exam Resumed for each exam will also be shown in the feedback area In the loaded exam screen you can make measurements and enter text BodyMarkers or indicators E Show in Image Area The images stored for an exam are displayed in the thumbnail area on the right side of the screen To review an image double click an image to review in the thumbnail area P Use the arrow buttons below the thumbnail area to move to the next or previous page in the thumbnail area The stored image information is displayed in the feedback area N NOTE Only scan data can be retrieved into the image area E Ending Continue Exam Press the End Exam button on the control panel MySonoU6 Operation Manual Closing Exam Review Press Close on the screen To close all exams in the list click the Close All button Layouts You can adjust the number of images displayed on the screen
213. nce E 9o StA Measure the area of the inner and outer walls of a blood vessel StA stands for Stenosis Area 1 Select the StA menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode 2 Measure the area of the vessel s outer wall using the Circ Area measurement method 3 When the second cursor appears measure the area of the inner wall of the vessel that is under stenosis 96StA Outer Area Inner Area Outer Area x 100 5 28 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations E 9o StD Measure the diameter of a blood vessel StD stands for Stenosis Distance 1 Select the StD menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode 2 Measure the total diameter of a vessel using the Distance measurement method 3 When a new cursor appears measure the inner wall diameter of the vessel that is under stenosis StD Outer Distance Inner Distance Outer Distance x 100 Heart Rate Measurement E HR Heart Rate You can calculate heart rates over a certain period of time 1 Select HR in the measurement menu A bar appears allowing you to specify a measurement area 2 Specify the measurement range P Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball and press the Set button 3 The system measures the heart rate within the specified range automatically 5 29 MySonoU6 Operation Manual OB Calculations NOTE P Ductus Venosus and Fetal HR can only be measured in Doppler Mode P For information on basic measurement
214. ncy the greater the attenuation of the ultrasonic energy Higher probe operating frequencies require higher output intensity to scan at a deeper depth To scan deeper at the same output intensity a lower probe frequency is required Using more gain and output beyond a point without corresponding increases in image quality can mean that a lower frequency probe is needed Receiver Controls Receiver controls are used by the operator to improve image quality These controls have no effect on output Receiver controls only affect how the ultrasound echo is received These controls include gain TGC dynamic range and image processing The important thing to remember concerning output is that the receiver controls should be optimized before increasing it For example before increasing output optimize gain to improve image quality 1 20 Chapter 1 Safety Additional Considerations Ensure that scanning time is kept to a minimum and ensure that only medically required scanning is performed Never compromise quality by rushing through an exam A poor exam will require a follow up which ultimately increases the time Diagnostic ultrasound is an important tool in medicine and like any tool should be used efficiently and effectively Output Display Features The system output display comprises two basic indices a mechanical index and a thermal index The thermal index consists of the following indices soft tissue Tls bone TIb and cra
215. ned P Never attempt to modify the product in any way P Read the instructions on safe operation of the product if using the product after a prolonged period of non use P Make sure that other objects such as metal pieces do not enter the system P Do not block the ventilation slots P Do not store the product inside a bag or any other enclosed space while it is powered on P Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the product Doing so might damage the cord and cause the product to short circuit or the cord itself to break Unplug the cord by pulling on the plug P Excessive bending or twisting of cables on patient applied parts may cause failure or intermittent operation of the system gt Improper cleaning or sterilization of a patient applied part may cause permanent damage Please refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance for detailed information on protection cleaning and disinfecting the equipment 1 16 Chapter 1 Safety Moving the Equipment Grab the handle on the rear of the product and move the product slowly Alternatively you can use the Samsung Medison cart sold separately NOTE If using the recommended cart avoid leaving the cart unattended on an uneven surface If N CAUTION Power off the product and disconnect all cables before moving it you must leave the cart on an uneven surface engage the brakes attached to the casters 1 17 MySonoU6 Operation Manual gt Biological Safety
216. needle guide 4 Confirm that the needle image is on the needle guidelines If so the needle guide is properly aligned 5 If the needle image is out of the needle guideline check the needle guide or the probe adapter 922 Chapter 9 Probes Cleaning and Disinfecting the Biopsy Kit Wash and disinfect the biopsy kit to reduce pathogens to the level of 10 Some components of the biopsy kit may be disposable Please read the biopsy kit user manual carefully before use N WARNING Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting biopsy kit Cleaning and Disinfecting a stainless steel biopsy kit E Cleaning 1 After use remove the biopsy kit from the probe 2 Disassemble the biopsy kit into its component parts if applicable 3 Using a small brush and water scrub each part to remove trapped material from the biopsy kit 4 Rinse with water to remove remaining particulates E Disinfection 1 Disinfect the adapter by autoclaving Steam or using gas Ethylene Oxide 2 After disinfection follow the proper post disinfection procedure for the disinfection method used Please refer to the disinfection user manual etc 3 Inspect the components for damage such as cracks rust or breakage If damaged contact Samsung Medisons service department MySonoU6 Operation Manual Cleaning and Disinfecting a plastic biopsy kit E Cleaning 1 After use remove the biopsy kit from the probe 2 Disassemb
217. next soft menu page 4 59 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Ruler Used to position the on screen ruler Use the soft menu s dial button 1 and select None Right Left Top Bottom or All E Bias Used to set the post curve bias Use the soft menu s dial button 2 to set to a value between 100 and 100 E Position Used to adjust the post curve position Set to a value between 0 and 100 by using the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu E Zoom Use the soft menu s dial button 4 and set to a value between 25 and 400 E L R Flip Use the 4 dial button on the soft menu Each press of the button flips the image horizontally m U D Fip Use the 5 dial button on the soft menu Each press of the button flips the image vertically E Prev Page Press the soft menu dial button 6 This brings up the previous soft menu page Layout Set the layout of slice images Select 1x1 2x1 3x2 3x3 or 4x3 The number of slices that can be displayed simultaneously on the screen varies depending on this setting If the layout is changed the selected slice image moves to the first position on the screen Ref Image Select A B or Cas the reference image 4 60 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes Orientation Dot Has the same function as the 4 dial button on the soft menu When this is on a dot appears at the center of the image Post Processing Post Processing is used to process slice images Clicking this button
218. nial bone Tic One of these three thermal indices will be displayed at all times Which one depends upon the system preset or user choice depending upon the application at hand The mechanical index is continuously displayed over the range of 0 0 to 1 9 in increments of 0 1 The thermal index consists of the three indices and only one of these is displayed all the time Each probe application has a default selection that is appropriate for that combination The Tib or Tis is continuously displayed over the range of 0 0 to maximum output based on the probe and application in increments of 0 1 The application specific nature of the default setting is also an important factor of index behavior A default setting is a system control state which is preset by the manufacturer or the operator The system has default index settings for the probe application The default settings are invoked automatically by the ultrasound system when power is turned on new patient data is entered into the system database or a change in application takes place The decision as to which of the three thermal indices to display should be based on the following criteria Appropriate index for the application Tis is used for imaging soft tissue and Tib for a focus at or near a bone Certain factors such as the presence of fluid or bone or the flow of blood might create artificially high or low thermal index readings A highly attenuating tissue path for example will ca
219. nt at a 10 mm interval Range Bar This option is used when a vessel is not lying laterally or the length of a specific segment is measured Press and hold the Set button at the start point and then drag the trackball to specify the end point 5 57 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Intima and Adventitia Pair gt Whichever of the Near and Far zones has the higher Ol is automatically selected as a measurement value and is represented by the color of the Risk Color Bar gt A pair with lower QI is represented in dark blue gt Press the Change button to switch between the Near and Far zones that have been automatically selected by using the QI value The measurement value and color presentation are also changed However if Ol is 0 the measurement value and color presentation will not be changed E Measure Result Table gt Max The maximum thickness of the Intima Adventitia pair gt Mean The average thickness of the Intima Adventitia pair gt SD Standard Deviation gt Ol The distance ratio of the measured point in a distance for Quality Index measurement gt Points The total number of the measured Intima Adventitia pairs Auto IMT Measurement 1 2 After checking the probe application and preset start carotid measurement If the desired images are obtained click Freeze Use the trackball to select an image for IMT measurement Press Auto IMT This loads up the Auto IMT screen gt If scanning is
220. ntrol Panel The control panel is used to operate the system oC e 9 co e im e C sonovew GREEN Leer ac r om el QUE tec Er EEEEEHEEEBEES TXITTITI TT Tab STEET TI rr oe Se EE Se J XR Figure 2 3 Control Panel The control panel consists of a keyboard soft menus buttons dials dial buttons sliders and a trackball A dial button can be used as both a dial and a button 29 ZEE MySonoU6 Operation Manual Functions of the Control Panel The following are the descriptions and instructions for the controls on the control panel For more information on controls with multiple functions see Chapter 3 and later in this manual l Q Button Turns the system on off On Off Displays the Patient Information screen for patient selection and Patient Button information entry Displays the Probe Selection screen which allows you to select or Probe Button A change the probe or application Finishes the exam of the currently selected patient and resets the End Exam Button related data Displays the report screen that shows the measurement results of the Report Button mus current application and other information M Button Pr
221. ntrol panel and the Patient Information screen will appear In this screen you can enter search or change patient information Patient information includes basic information such as the patient ID name DOB and gender together with additional information for applications N NOTE The ID and name fields are required Basic Patient Information Entry You can enter or change basic patient data at the top of the Patient Information screen Use the trackball and the Set button to select the desired field Alternatively use the Ext Menu dial button to navigate through the fields E ID Enter a patient ID gt To enter a patient ID manually type the appropriate ID into the ID field gt To enter a patient ID automatically select Auto ID Creation and click New The icon next to the ID field is changed to FE gt If you enter an ID that already exists the icon next to the ID field is changed to BH E Name Enter the patient s full name gt Last Name Enter the patient s last name gt First Name Enter the patient s first name gt Middle Enter the patient s middle name The name that you have entered will appear in the title area and reports 3 9 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Birth Enter the patient s date of birth in the specified format E Age Enter the patient s age in yy mm format When a birth date is specified in the Birth field this information is automatically calculated and displayed E Gen
222. nts are recommended because of both their biological effectiveness as qualified through the FDA 510 k process and their chemical compatibility with Samsung Medison ultrasound products Solutions Country Type Active ingredient FDA 510 k Cidex USA Liquid Gluteraldehyde K934434 Cidex Plus USA Liquid Gluteraldehyde K923744 Turn off the system and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet 1 Mix the disinfectant solution that is compatible with your system to the solution strength specified on the instruction label 2 Clean the exterior surface of the product in compliance with the instructions supplied with the disinfectant 3 Air dry or towel dry the surface with a sterile cloth according to the instructions on the disinfectant label 85 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual Accuracy Check requirements of safety standard EN 60601 1 Only trained personnel are allowed to perform these NOTE The user must ensure that safety inspections are performed every 2 years according to the safety inspections The product s maintenance status may affect the measurements obtained when using the product The product should be maintained in an optimal state to ensure reliable measurements To ensure optimal operation of the product perform an accuracy check every year The equations and table related to measurement accuracy are included in Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations in this manual 86 Ch
223. nu gt Mode Select Used to change the mode tab Select a mode by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu gt Default Setting Press the soft menu s dial button 2 to restore default settings gt Delete Press the soft menu s dial button 3 to delete the selected item Available only when a button or dial from the edit and preview area is selected gt User Presets Press the soft menu s dial button 4 to save the configured menu as a separate file Saved files can be opened and accessed at a later point in time gt User Presets Edit UserPreset by pressing the soft menu s dial button 4 existing UserPresets are displayed in Usersets List 7 86 Chapter 7 Utilities Figure 7 51 User Presets Load Applies the selected User Preset to the system Save Saves the current settings to the selected UserPreset Save As Saves the current settings to new UserPreset Rename Changes the name of the selected UserPreset Delete Deletes the selected UserPreset Close Exits from User Presets window gt Apply Press the soft menu s dial button 5 to apply the configured menu to the system The system needs to reboot in order for the change to fully take place gt Close Press the soft menu s dial button 6 to exit from menu edit SCH NOTE User configured menus and user presets can be backed up and restored 7 8 Maintenance E Operating Environment 8 3
224. nu when the 3D probe s application is OB Press the soft menu s dial button 5 to turn Auto ROI on or off Once turned on the volume box is automatically positioned over the area that will be converted into 3D Auto ROI Considerations When Auto ROl is used the following should be taken into account P Only images of the fetal body can be acquired P Auto ROI is affected by the brightness or contrast of 2D images P Once Auto ROI is turned on the position or size of the volume box cannot be changed E Scan Angle Used to adjust the scan angle Rotate the soft menu s dial button 6 to adjust the scan angle The available scan angle range varies depending on the probe being used 440 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes Acquiring 3D 4D Images 1 2 Press the 3D 4D button on the control panel This loads the 3D standby screen Select the desired 3D mode by using the soft menu 1 Specify the location and size of the ROI Box as desired Configure the settings by using the soft menu 2 through 6 Pressthe Freeze or Set button on the control panel The system will start acquiring 3D images Once 3D image acquisition is complete the 3D View screen will be shown if configured to do so gt If soft menu 2 is set to MPR 3D View will be launched If it is set to MSV or Oblique View 3D XI will be launched gt Ifa left right reversed 3D image is obtained the image will also be shown left right reversed in 3D
225. nual PD Mode Rotate the soft menu s dial button 2 and select between PD Mode and DPDI Mode gt PD Mode Displays blood flow intensity elements only gt DPDI Mode Stands for Directional Power Doppler Imaging and displays information on blood flow intensity and direction NOTE For more information on other soft menu options and functions refer to the 2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode sections 422 Diagnosis Modes PW Spectral Doppler Mode PW stands for Pulse Wave This mode displays the blood flow speed at a specific blood vessel location within a specific time frame Distance depth information can also be obtained by transmitting pulses over time frames This mode is useful for measuring low speed blood flow such as in the abdomen and peripheral vessels The 2D Mode image is also shown allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area within the entire image U6 FR 50Hz 16 0cm MI 0 53 2011 10 21 Cardiac P2 4 Res Tis 4 4 02 47 47 PM G50 118dB FA0 P95 G50 F2 5 00 kHz 2 00 114 00 mm 0 Speed hz Angle 10 Steps SV Size 2 BaseLine Doppler Invert Off Simultaneous Off Angle 60 Steps AutoGalc Off Figure 4 5 PW Spectral Doppler Mode 4 23 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Starting amp Ending PW Spectral Doppler Mode Press the PW button on the control panel to enter PW Spectral Doppler mode Press it again to return to 2D Mode Press the Set button on the control panel to obtain a spe
226. obe port 3 Push down the probe s lockdown switch to lock it in place 2 20 Chapter 2 Introduction MySono U6 Cart sold separately The MySono U6 cart can be used as a base station for your MySono U6 or to move it around For more information on using and setting up MySono U6 Cart refer to the accompanying manual Figure 2 8 MySono U6 Cart Two Probe Connector sold separately Using a two probe connector lets you connect two probes at once Power off the main unit Plug the two probe connector into the bottom section of the cart s upper tray 1 2 3 Secure the connector in place by using screws RH Sem s MS4 10 Ni 3EA 4 Join the two probe connector to the main unit s probe port Connect probes in the same manner as you would with a single probe Figure 2 9 Two Probe Connector 221 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Accessories An accessory box containing the items below is supplied with the product li SONO GEL FUSE GROUND CABLE MANUAL DVI2RGB GENDER POWER CORD WINDOWS XP LABEL Figure 2 10 Accessories Optional Functions This product has the following optional functions P 4D P DICOM gt 3DXI P Spatial Compound gt CW Function gt DynamicMR gt Cardiac Measurement gt Auto IMT For further information about optional functions please refer to the relevant chapters in this manual Starting Diagnosis DR 3 3 AC AdaptengGonnectio nee 3 3 e le 3 4 Power
227. ode 3D 4D Mode 3D Mode 4D Mode optional N NOTE The functionalities for each mode may be restricted by the selected probe 43 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual Basic Operating Instructions The items that are commonly used in each diagnosis mode are shown below Using the Control Panel The items that can be used in each diagnosis mode are provided as menu items You can change the image format or optimize an image to facilitate your diagnosis E Q Scan Gain Q Scan Pressing the relevant dial button enables Quick Scan The EN mark will appear at the top of an image In 2D Mode it is used to optimize the contrast and brightness of an image by adjusting Gain and TGC automatically In PW Spectral Doppler Mode it is used to optimize the spectrum by adjusting Scale and Baseline automatically N NOTE The Quick Scan function is only available with specific probes and applications gt Gain Rotate this dial button to adjust Gain The Gain button appears differently depending on the diagnosis mode but it is usually in the form of a dial button used to select a diagnosis mode You can adjust the brightness of an image If you rotate the Gain dial button clockwise its value increases E Angle ax NOTE Available in 2D mode and Spectral Doppler mode only Rotating the dial in Spectral Doppler mode adjusts the angle of the sample volume in 1 increments In 2D mode rotating the dial scrolls the image lef
228. ode results when UnFreeze is selected E Clear Measure M D Mode Result On UnFreeze Check the checkbox to delete M or D mode results when UnFreeze is selected after measurement Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Number of Measure Results Displayed Number of Results Displayed Specify the number of lines for OB measurement results that are displayed on the screen OB Doppler Results Specify the Doppler measurement results to display when OB measurement is taken in Doppler mode Use the check boxes to make your selections PSV and EDV however cannot be unselected OB Measurement Result E Measurement Result Type Used to specify the measurement result type Select Avg Last Max or Min value 7 68 Chapter 7 Utilities Tables Select the sub tab Tables under the OB tab You can specify references such as reference tables and equations that will be used by each measurement item OB Tables Fetal Weight GA Table EFW Equation Growth Table EFW Growth None None Hellman Campbell Korean Hadlock Nyberg Hadlock1 Tokyo Hadlock2 Hansmann Hadlock3 Rempen Hadlock4 Hansmann Merz Osaka e a 9 EFW Sequential Measurement EFW Hadlock2 AC Figure 7 40 OB Tables E Items This setting is intended for the measurement of the gestational age GA and the fetal size Growth Select items in the following order 1 Select a measurement item from the list on the left 2 Select a reference type from
229. ods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter Shoulder gt Wrist gt Knee gt Ankle Figure 5 27 General MSK Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Subitem Method Unit Shoulder Wie 1410 Distance cm mm Knee Ankle 5 86 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Pediatric Hips Calculations General Measurement Menu The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter Pediatric Hips gt Rt Hip Angle gt Lt Hip Angle Figure 5 28 General Pediatric Hips Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit Calculation of angle after measurement of three straight lines Rt Hip Angle Lt Hip Angle Hip Angle Al Measurement Methods 1 Specify the first straight line by using the trackball and the Set button gt Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button Repositioning Point Instead of pressing the Set button to confirm the point position you can press the Change button to reset it 2 Repeat the above process to specify two other straight lines 3 The angle between them will be calculated automatically gt a The angle m
230. ods are available E Sending Exam Send all images for an exam 1 Select an exam from the Exam List 2 Click the Send button at the bottom of the screen All images for the selected exam will be sent E Sending Selected Images Lets you select which of the exam images you wish to transfer 1 Search an exam from the SONOVIEW screen 2 Select an image Oy 3 Press the Send Image to DICOM Storage icon at the bottom of the screen The selected images will be sent Chapter 6 Image Management Printing Images Press the Print 1 or Print 2 button Images are printed via an echo printer For information on configuring the printer refer to Chapter 7 Utilities 637 MySonoU6 Operation Manual es SONOVIEW SONOVIEW is MySono U6 5s integrated image management program It offers image saving referencing and deleting functions as well as data exchange compatibility with regular computers The image file types used in this product follow the international standard DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine As a result the PACS Picture Archiving Communication System can be implemented without any additional costs and it s easy to exchange image files with other hospitals or pieces of equipment This product supports the Bitmap file format bmp which is commonly used on standard PCs ensuring easier exchange of image data Starting SONOVIEW Press the SONOVIEW key on the keyboard Switch to the SONOVIEW screen
231. olor Format 2D C Live Prev Next Page Color Map Color Invert i 3 Angle 10 Steps Post Curve AutoCalc AutoCalc Direction Power Chroma Map Baseline Scale Doppler Avg Chroma Map Spectrum Ehn Doppler Invert PW Mode Display Format Spectrum Type Filter Dynamic Range Steer Mean Trace Frequency Speed Simultaneous Gray Map SV Size TDW Loop Size Angle 60 Steps Prev Next Page 7 85 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Mode Item Angle 10 Steps Scale AutoCalc Direction Spectrum Ehn Baseline Spectrum Type Doppler invert Chroma Map Speed SE CW Mode Mean Trace Display Format Angle 60 Steps TDW Dynamic Range AutoCalc Prev Next Page Loop Size Chroma Map Power Doppler Avg Angle 10 Steps Power Chroma Map AutoCalc Direction Scale Doppler Avg Baseline Spectrum Ehn Doppler Invert TDW Mode Chroma Map Spectrum Type Filter Display Format Steer Mean Trace Dynamic Range Speed TDW Frequency SV Size AutoCalc Loop Size Angle 60 Steps Prev Next Page Chroma Map M Edge Enhance Anatomical M Display Format Post Curve Chroma Map M Mode Dynamic Range Power Harmonic Gray Map Reject Level Negative Loop Size Speed Prev Next Page Cine Speed Cine Loop Page Trim First Cine Save Trim Last Pos Trim Last Cine Play Prev Next Page Auto IMT Trim First Pos OQ Edit and Preview Area Used to position the item that was selected from the menu item list Select a button or dial that becomes activated upon its selection Soft Me
232. ometry and finite target size Target misalignment Ultrasonic transducer misalignment Water temperature Ultrasonic attenuation and acoustic streaming Coupling or shielding foil properties Plane wave assumption Environmental influences Excitation voltage measurement Ultrasonic transducer temperature Effects due to nonlinear propagation and saturation loss The overall findings of the analysis give a rough Acoustic Power accuracy figure of 10 for the frequency range of 1 10 MHz Training The operator of this equipment must become thoroughly familiar with the correct use of the equipment in order to optimize its performance and recognize possible malfunctions It is recommended that all users receive proper training before operation Applications training is available through the Samsung Medison Customer Service Department or from one oftheir worldwide customer service representatives 1331 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual ee Environmental Protection AN 132 CAUTION P To dispose of the system or accessories that have come to the end of their lifespan contact the vendor or follow appropriate disposal procedures P You are responsible for complying with the relevant regulations for waste disposal P The lithium ion battery used in the product must be replaced by a Samsung Medison service engineer or an authorized dealer s Battery Pack Chapter 1 Safety Familiarize yourself with the instru
233. ommon mode 2KV common mode commer cial or hospital environment Voltage dips short interruptions and voltage variations on power supply input lines IEC 61000 4 11 596 Ur for 0 5 cycles 29596 dip in Ut 4096 Ur for 5 cycles 60 dip in Ur 70 Ur for 25 cycles 30 dip in Ur lt 5 Ur for 5 s 9596 dip in Ut lt 5 Ur for 0 5 cycles 29596 dip in Ur 4096 Ur for 5 cycles 6096 dip in Ur 7096 Ur for 25 cycles 3096 dip in Ur 5906 Ur for5 s 9596 dip in Ut Mains power quality should be that of a typical commer cial or hospital environment If the user of this product requires continued operation during power mains interrup tions it is recommended that this product be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or a battery Power frequency 50 60Hz magnetic field IEC 61000 4 8 3 A m 3 A m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commer cial or hospital environment NOTE Ur is the a c mains voltage prior to application of the test level 1 11 1 12 MySonoU6 Operation Manual IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic Immunity test test level level environment guidance Conducted RF 3Vrms 0 01V Portable and mobile RF communications IEC 61000 4 6 150 kHz equipment should be used no closer to any part of to 80MHz the Ultrasound System including cables than the recomm
234. on Graph screen Click Graph on the Ultrasound Report screen to view graphs and history Ge NOTE The graph function can be used only with OB reports To return to the report screen click Report Graph A list of measured items appears on the left side of the screen If you select an item a graph for the selected item will appear on the screen 5 95 MySonoU6 Operation Manual U6 Ultrasound Report OB Measure Trend Patient Information ID Exam Date Name BirthDate Gender Age 2011 10 20 0002 2011 10 23 Doe Jane 1988 10 20 Female 23yr 0m Fetus Information A AUA 25w6d A EDD AUA 2012 01 30 Comment Comment Report Figure 5 33 Graph NOTE gt To display a graph the LMP or Estab Due Date should be saved under Patient Information and the GA table and Fetal Growth table should be enabled P A graph is created based on the patient ID LMP and measurement date E Select a Graph Use the trackball and the Set button to select an item from the list E Display Graph If the 2 x 2 checkbox is checked 4 graphs will be displayed in a screen Specify a desired graph by checking the checkbox for a measurement item 5 96 2011 10 23 0 32 42 PM Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations E Percentile Criteria Select LMP EstabDD or Avg US GA gt GA by LMP The GA is calculated based on the maternal LMP gt Estab Due Date The GA is calculated based on the Estab Due
235. on applicable to the frequency of the transmitter where p is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts W according to the transmitter NOTE 1 At 80MHz and 800MHZz the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures objects and people 1 13 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Electromagnetic Environment Guidance Ultrasound systems must be used only in shielded locations offering at least the minimal level of RF shielding effectiveness and where all the cables found are also shielded Field strengths outside the shielded location from fixed RF transmitters as determined by an electromagnetic site survey should be less than 3V m It is essential to verify that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location meet the minimum specifications A Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference CAUTION If you connect the product to a LAN or any other remote device you possess Samsung Medison will not be held responsible for any problem arising in the presence of an electromagnetic field Typical interference on Ultrasound Imaging Systems varies depending on Electromagnetic phenomena Please refer to the following table Imaging Mode ESD RF Power Line 2D or 3D Change of operating For sector imaging probes Whi
236. on area 2 Use the trackball and the Set button to specify the starting point of the measurement area gt Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button 3 Use the trackball to draw the desired curve and then press the Set button to set the end point Editing Curves Before specifying the end point by pressing the Set button you can delete part of the curve being traced by rotating the 5 Delete dial button on the soft menu 4 Specify both end points and then the length of the curve will be automatically measured MySonoU6 Operation Manual Angle This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes You can specify two straight lines in a 2D image and measure the angle between them 1 Press Caliper and select Angle under soft menu 1 Angle is shown in the user information area 2 Draw two straight lines For instructions on drawing lines refer to Distance 3 The angle between two lines will be calculated and displayed on the screen gt When two angles are calculated the smaller angle is displayed 9oStD StD stands for Stenosis Distance which is a basic measurement available in all diagnosis modes In a 2D image the diameter of a vessel is measured and the stenosis ratio calculated 1 Press Caliper and select StD under soft menu 1 96StD is shown in the user information area 2 Measure the total diameter of a vessel using the Distance meas
237. onds before powering on the system T MySonoU6 Operation Manual Recharging the Battery Pack Connecting the AC adapter automatically begins to recharge the battery pack The battery pack will be recharged faster if MySono U6 is powered off or in power saving mode A WARNING gt If the low battery message appears while using the product save the diagnosis information right away and connect the AC adapter as soon as you can P Before connecting the AC adapter make sure that the plug is the right way up Forcing the adapter into the product in the wrong way can damage the product P Do not recharge the battery pack using any method other than that described in this manual Doing so may lead to a fire or an explosion Figure 8 1 AC Adapter Connection The battery pack must be charged and discharged within the following temperature ranges Status Ambient Temperature Charge 0 45 C Discharge 10 50 C A A 8 8 CAUTION The ideal charging temperature is between 0 C and 40 C The battery pack can overheat if the ambient temperature is too high or can take much longer than normal to recharge if the temperature is too low NOTE If using the battery pack as the power source check the battery icon shown on the screen to find out how much battery life is left For more information on battery icons refer to the Battery section in Chapter 2 Introduction Chapter 8 Maintenance Storing the B
238. onitor Calibration from the post curve menu to access the related settings Brightness Used to adjust the screen brightness Use the Ext Menu dial button to set a value between 0 and 100 The selected value applies only to the image shown on the screen Contrast Used to adjust the screen contrast Use the Ext Menu dial button to set a value between 0 and 100 The selected value applies only to the image shown on the screen Default Press the Ext Menu dial button to reset the settings to Type 1 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Edit Used to adjust the user type RGB curve N NOTE Activated only when Curve is set to User1 through 3 Selecting this option changes the soft menu E Picker Pos Used to specify a point on the curve Rotate the soft menu s dial button 1 to reposition the point The point is yellow in color E Insert Pressing the soft menu s dial button 2 inserts a new point between the current point and the next point E Delete Pressing the soft menu s dial button 3 deletes the selected point E Save Pressing the soft menu s dial button 4 saves the current RGB curve E Color Select a curve Rotate the soft menu s dial button 5 to select Red Green or Blue E Exit Pressing the soft menu s dial button 6 finalizes the current task and exits you from the edit screen 7 10 Chapter 7 Utilities Curve Used to specify the curve type Use the Ext Menu dial button to set t
239. opposite direction The trace line can only be deleted if measuring a doppler spectrum using Manual Trace E Delete Measurement Result Press the Clear button on the control panel NOTE The measurement results are deleted from the screen but still shown on the report for the corresponding application E Print Measurement Result Press the Print 1 or Print 2 button on the control panel E Exit Measurement Press the Exit button on the control panel E End Diagnosis Press the End Exam button on the control panel The diagnosis for the current patient ends and all measurement results are saved N NOTE For information on various application related settings refer to Chapter 7 Utilities 522 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Soft Menu The following soft menu options are available for each application while a measurement is in progress Package rdiac Result Action Mo Tab Undo Move Figure 5 2 Mid Measurement Soft Menu by Application E HR Cycle Activated when measuring the heart rate in M or D mode Rotate the soft menu s 1 dial button and adjust the heart rate cycle to between 1 and 20 E Package Select a measurement package by pressing the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu Each press of the button changes the application E Trace Direction Used to change the doppler spectrum s trace direction Rotate the 2 dial button beneath the soft menu and select from Up Down and All This is enab
240. or delete a server The server information is used to identify DICOM for the system within a network It is also used to transfer data to other DICOM servers NOTE For IP Address AE Title and Port No settings contact your organization s network administrator 7 37 MySonoU6 Operation Manual AETitle Enter the name of the DICOM AE Application Entity The title is used to identify devices that use DICOM within a network e g US1 US2 etc E Station Name Enter the name of the system Along with AE Title it is often used to identify the system in the DICOM network eg O31 Q32 etc E Port No Enter the port number on the server being used DICOM Send Format Specify the storage format for the 2D or Color Mode images for which the DICOM services will be used Select either Color or Gray by using the combo button If you select Gray images are saved in grayscale format NOTE DICOM Send Format settings begin to apply when an image is saved For example when set to Gray an image is saved as a grayscale image DICOM Compression Select whether to compress the still images for the DICOM service Select Uncompressed or JPEG Baseline by using the combo button When you select Uncompressed the images are saved without compression NOTE The DICOM Compression setting is applied when the image is saved That is if JPEG Baseline is set the image is compressed when it is saved Store SR at End of Exam Select
241. ormat Select a format by using the combo button Display Font Option Font Document Font Name Age TGC Line Font Name Font Size Helvetica Arial Arial Black TI Display Tis Arial Narrow Batang BatangChe Doppler Axis Comic Sans MS Velocity Frequency Name Birthday Image Info Font Color Preview LMP GAJEDD Display LMP GA AaBb12 Default LMP GA Information Bar Replace ID Information Bar Replace Name information Bar Replace App oe Measure Result Date 2011 07 29 None Date Format YYYY MM DD Time 11 07 36 am Time Format 12 Hour Figure 7 13 Setup Display 7 23 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Annotate Select the Annotate tab in the Setup screen Specify display related options BodyMarker Text Setup Size Option Small Medium Quick Text Option Auto Text Erase BodyMarker Auto Active Boot up Caps Lock On Autotext Bodymarker Edit Clear Annotation Autotext Edit Figure 7 14 Setup Annotation BodyMarker B Size Used to specify the BodyMarker picture size Select Small Medium or Large E Option gt BodyMarker Auto Active Select whether to activate the BodyMarker mode automatically when the active image area is changed 7 24 Chapter 7 Utilities E BodyMarker Edit mi Kum MA Meer E eeu LEE EE ed ES 5 ES Bg BOSE e OO000 np Figure 7 15 BodyMarker Edit BodyMarker list The list varies depending on the group selecte
242. over from the product This product uses levels of voltage that are p g potentially dangerous All internal component repairs and part replacements must be performed by Samsung Medisons5 service department P Always check the product s casing cables cords and plugs for damage before using the product Do not use and disconnect the power source if the face is cracked chipped or torn the housing is damaged or if the cable is worn P Always disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the system gt All patient contact devices such as the probe must be detached from the patient prior to using a high voltage defibrillator P The use of flammable anesthetic gas or oxidizing gases should be avoided Doing so may cause an explosion P Avoid installing the system in such a way that it is difficult for the operator to disconnect it from the power source gt Only use an AC adapter recommended by Samsung Medison CAUTION P An isolation transformer protects the system from power surges The isolation transformer continues to operate when the system is in standby P Do not immerse the cable in liquids The power cable is not waterproof P Do not touch the SIP SOP terminal on the rear of the product while diagnosing the patient There is a risk of electric shock from leakage current Additional equipment connected to medical electrical equipment must comply with the respective IEC standards e g IEC 6
243. peak intensity E Focus Changing the focal depth will change the MI Generally higher MI values will occur when the focal depth is near the natural focus of the transducer Color and Power Controls E Color Sensitivity Increasing the color sensitivity may increase the TI More time is spent scanning for color images Color pulses are the dominant pulse type in this mode E Color Sector Width Narrower color sector width will increase color frame rate and the TI will increase The system may automatically decrease pulse voltage to stay below the system maximum A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease the MI If pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed Doppler will remain as the primary mode and the TI change will be small 124 Chapter 1 Safety E Color Sector Depth Deeper color sector depth may automatically decrease color frame rate or select a new color focal zone or color pulse length The TI will change due to the combination of these effects Generally the TI will decrease with increased color sector depth MI will correspond to the peak intensity of the dominant pulse type which is a color pulse However if pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed Doppler will remain the dominant mode and the TI change will be small E Scale Using the SCALE control to increase the color velocity range may increase the TI The system will automatically adjust pulse voltage to stay below the system maximums A decrease in pulse vol
244. pectrum trace Manual Trace Doppler spectrum trace General Vmax Velocity cm s m s DurT Time ms Vesl Area Area cm mm Vesl Dist Distance cm mm Vol Flow Auto Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow D Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow TAMV Doppler spectrum trace cm s m s Vesl Area Area cm mm Vesl Dist Distance cm mm HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5 66 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations UE Vein Calculations Takes upper extremity vein measurements The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P Itis convenient to calculate each measurement value on the spectral doppler image P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 General Measurement Menu UE Vein Internal Jugular Y gt Innominate gt Subclavian Y gt Axillary V gt Brachial V gt Cephalic Y gt Basilic V gt Radial Y gt Ulnar Y gt General gt Vol Flow HR Figure 5 16 General UE Vein Measurement Menu 5 67 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Method Unit Internal Jugular V Auto Trace Doppler spectrum trace Innominate V n subelavisn V Limited Trace Doppler spectr
245. performed when the center of the vessel is aligned with the center of the image area IMT measurement starts automatically Usethe trackball and the Set button to set a location for IMT measurement gt Select a point between Near and Far gt If the vessel image quality is poor select an area that is close to the Intima to be measured gt If a detailed area has to be selected use Range Bar gt Press Space Bar on the keyboard to turn the Intima and Adventitia marker on off 5 Once the measurement location is set the measurement values are listed in a table 5 58 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Auto IMT Measurements Analysis 1 Press Analysis to bring up the Analysis screen 2 Select the desired analysis from Framingham CHD Risk Factor Normal IMT and User Graph by using the trackball and the Set button gt A bar corresponding to the measurement result is displayed on each graph However no bar is displayed if the measurement result is smaller than Framingham CHD or Risk Factor User Graph You can use User Graph to adjust the graph and analyze the measurement results as you want 3 To finish analysis press Analysis again The following materials were referred to when analyzing the measurements of Auto IMT E Framingham CHD Correlation between the Framingham Risk Score and Intima Media Thickness the Paroi Arterielle et Risque Cardio vasculair PARC Study Pierre Jean Touboul EricVicaut Julien
246. played Center of the Region E Na Figure 7 34 General General Cursor amp Method E Line Marker Type Specify the shape of the caliper cursor displayed on the screen Either Cross Hair or Arrow Head can be selected E Circ and area method Specify the method for measuring circumference and area Either Ellipse or Trace can be selected By default the selected method appears when the Caliper button is pressed Therefore you can start measurement more easily by specifying the most commonly used measurement method For more information on Ellipse and Trace please refer to the Circumference and Area Measurement section in Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations 7 57 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Apply Auto Resizing Line Marker Select whether to automatically reduce the marker cursor size when the distance between the start point and the moving point is 50 pixels or less at the time of measurement Line Type From the following three options select the line pattern to use when measuring a distance Dotted Line Displays a dotted line E Hidden Dotted Line Displays only the start and end points of the line E Hidden Dotted line after SET Displays a dotted line while measuring then after the line has been finalized with the Set button the dotted line will disappear Selecting Line Type If you select Hidden Dotted Line or Hidden Dotted Line after SET you can keep images from being interfered wit
247. played in tab format Select the tab you wish to configure by using the trackball and the Set button on the control panel The selected tab is highlighted in yellow Menu Item List Displays menu options that are available in the selected mode Use the trackball and the Set button to select an item from the list The selected item is highlighted in yellow Following items can be selected for each mode 7 84 Chapter 7 Utilities Mode Item 2D Image Size Post Curve NUN Angle 10 Steps Power q y Harmonic Chroma Map Reject Level L R Fli DMR Index Rotation diia MLine Dynamic Range Scan Area Edge Enhance SRF Index Pulse Inversi n 2D Mode 9 Spatial Compound Focus Tissue SRF Frame Avg 2D C Live z Trapezoidal Frame Rate Change Window U D Flip FSI Chroma Map e Write Zoom Gray Map DMR Prev Next Page Line Denstity Ext Res i 3 Balance Line Density Filter Baseline Power e Harmonic Color Format Scale M Line C Mode Color Map Sensitivity TDI Color Mode Steer Write Zoom Frame Avg 2D C Live Prev Next Page Frequency Color Invert Balance Line Density Color Invert Baseline Power Filter Color Format Scale Harmonic PD Mode Color Map Sensitivity MLine Color Mode Steer TDI Frame Avg PD Mode Write Zoom Frequency 2D C Live Prev Next Page Balance Color Mode e Filter Baseline Power Harmonic Frame Avg Scale geg M Une TDI Mode Frequency Sensitivity TDI Line Density Steer e Write Zoom C
248. plays the Help Manual on the screen Help F2 Es Displays the Utility menu on the screen Utility F3 D Starts Indicator mode Indicator T Activates text mode However with the check box under Utility Setup F4 Annotate Text Setup Quick Text selected you can enter text right Text away without pressing this button r7 F5 Starts BodyMarker mode BodyMarker F6 SonoView Launches SONOVIEW an image filing program F7 Dual Used for Dual mode F8 Single Converts to Single mode Available while in Dual mode F9 BPD F10 AC These buttons are used to assign user defined measurement functions F11 FL The function of each button can be set in Utility gt Setup gt User Defined Key Measure Key Setup F12 CRL Prt Scr SysRq GS Pause Break Print 2 The function of this button can be set in Utility gt Setup gt User Defined Key Each press of the bar removes items from the screen in the order of image information gt gray scale bar color bar gt TGC When all of the Space Bar items have been removed from the screen pressing the space bar once more reloads all the items back onto the screen T Vo 40 OL Used to adjust the monitor s brightness level GEI gi Used to adjust the volume while in spectral Doppler mode 2 13 zm MySonoU6 Operation Manual Console The console is made up mostly of ultrasound imaging components on the inside and various connectors anda handle on the outside The console s sections
249. pter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit TV Ann Diam All Distance cm mm TV Diam 1 All Distance cm mm TV Diam 2 All Distance cm mm TVA Planimetry All Area cm mm TV Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace TV Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s TVE A PW Velocity cm s m s TV PHT PW Time ms TVVTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm TV AccT PW Time ms de TV Dec PW Time ms TV A Dur PW Time ms R R Int M PW Heart Rate bpm TRVCW PW Distance cm mm TR PISA Rad PISA Radius cm mm TR Alias Vel Velocity cm s m s TR Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace TR Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s TR VTI PW Doppler spectrum trace cm mm RAP PW RAP mmHg HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5 49 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Adult Echo System Measurement Menu Chamber Valve Pediatric Cardiac Pulm Veins P Vein S D P Vein S Vmax P Vein D Vmax P Vein A Vmax P Vein A Dur gt Hepatic Veins gt Shunts gt Qp Qs gt Tissue Doppler gt Tei Index HR Figure 5 8 Adult Echo System Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit S D PW Continuous measurement S Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s Heide D Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s A Vmax PW Velocity cm s m s A Dur PW Time ms MPA Diam All Distance cm mm LPA Diam All Distance cm mm RPA Diam All Distance cm mm PEd All Distance cm
250. r General Measurement Menu The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report ACA gt MCA gt PCA P1 PCA P2 gt Dist Basilar A gt Mid Basilar A gt Prox Basilar A gt General gt Vol Flow Figure 5 26 General TCD Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Subitem Mode Method Unit Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace ACA Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace MCA PSV PW Velocity cm s m s PCA P1 PCA P2 EDV PW Velocity cm s m s Distal Basilar A Mid Basilar A StA All Calculation after area measurement Prox Basilar A Calculation after distance 0 9 General SE A measurement i Vesl Area All Area cm mm Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm 5 84 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Measurement Menul Subitem Mode Method Unit Vol Flow Auto PW Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow D PW Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow TAMV PW Doppler spectrum trace cm s or m s Vesl Dist All Distance cm mm Vesl Area All Area cm mm 5 85 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Musculoskeletal Calculations General Measurement Menu The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE For information on basic measurement meth
251. r Click Close to cancel Storage Image Alias Verify Transfer Figure 6 11 DICOM Storage Printing via DICOM You can print the selected images via DICOM The icon is enabled only when an image s is selected The icon is disabled in a system where DICOM is not enabled 1 After selecting an image Click the Send Image to DICOM Print icon on the screen The DICOM Printer window will be displayed 2 Click the Transfer button to transfer the selected image to the DICOM server and print it Click Close to cancel Verify Transfer Figure 6 12 DICOM Printer Chapter 6 Image Management Transferring Images N NOTE Image transfer will not be performed if there are spaces in the file or directory name 1 Press the Export Image icon Mon the screen The Image Export window will be displayed 2 Specify the various parameters such as directory drive filename and file format 3 Click the Export button to start a transfer Click Close to cancel Export Option Figure 6 13 Image Export Sending in E mail oy 1 Click the Send E mail icon RI The E mail window will appear 2 Specify the various parameters such as Sender and Recipient 3 Checkthe images that you want to attach from the thumbnail list and then enter the body text 4 Click the Send button to transfer the selected image Click Close to cancel When e mail cannot be transferred even though the mail server is working properly please
252. r Print 2 button on the control panel E Exiting basic measurements Press the Exit button on the control panel NOTE To change settings such as measurement units select Utility Measure Setup General For more information refer to Chapter 7 Utilities 5 10 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Distance Measurement Distance This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes You can specify two points in a 2D image and measure the straight distance between them 1 Press Caliper and select Distance under soft menu 1 Distance is shown in the user information area 2 Usethe trackball and the Set button to designate the two end points of the measurement area gt Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button Repositioning Point Instead of pressing the Set button to confirm the point position you can press the Change button to reset it 3 Specify both end points and then the distance between them will be measured 4 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen Line Trace This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes You can specify a point in a 2D image and trace a curve from that point to a second point on the image You can then measure the distance between the two points 1 Press Caliper and select Line Trace under soft menu 1 Line Trace is displayed in the user informati
253. rasound System should be observed to verify normal operation If abnormal performance is observed additional measures may be necessary such as re orienting or relocating the Ultrasound System or using a shielded location with a higher RF shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80MHz field strengths should be less than V1 V m Chapter 1 Safety Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and MySono U6 This product is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled The customer or the user of this product can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment transmitters and this product as recommended below according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter m Rated maximum output 150kHz to 80MHz 80MHz to 800MHz 800MHz to 2 5GHz power of transmitter des pm DE m dires WP Ww V4 E1 E1 V1 0 01Vrms E1 3 V m E1 3V m 0 01 35 00 0 11 0 23 0 1 110 68 0 36 0 73 1 350 00 1 16 2 33 10 1106 80 3 68 7 37 100 3500 00 11 66 23 33 manufacturer For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above the recommended separation distance d in meters m can be estimated using the equati
254. rate m BP Enter systolic diastolic pressure blood pressure 341 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Diag Physician Enter the name of the physician who diagnosed the patient When there is more than one physician involved you can use the combo button to make a selection E Ref Physician Enter the referring physician s name When there is more than one physician involved you can use the combo button to make a selection E Sonographer Enter the name of the sonographer who scanned the patient When there is more than one sonographer involved you can use the combo button to make a selection E Description Enter a description of the diagnosis If a description is entered it can be searched for and viewed under Description in SONOVIEW Category General Diag Physician Ref Physician Sonographer Description Figure 3 3 Study Information General 3 12 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis OB Select OB under Category Enter the additional obstetrical information LMP Number of Fetuses GA LMP Day of Cycle EDD LMP Para Estab DueDate Gravida Ovul Date Aborta Ectopic Figure 3 4 Study Information OB m LMP Enter the last menstrual period for a patient You can enter it manually or have it automatically calculated and displayed with the GA entered E GA LMP Indicates the gestational age of a patient You can enter it manually or have it automatically calculated and displayed with the L
255. re information P Do not submerge the battery pack in water or a low it to get wet P Do not place the battery pack inside a microwave oven an electric oven or a pressurized container P If the battery pack begins to leak produce an odor or generate heat do not use it or store it in the vicinity of an inflammable material or substance P Do not use the battery pack if you notice suspicious signs such as an odor heat or deformation For more information on battery pack care refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance 1 33 Introduction mE Specificatii ON cosciente ete 2 3 SW Product Configuration 2 6 Klo Fe 2 7 ee He e 2 9 Gro reece ceecerm try E tite erent merce 2 14 Peripheral Devices eene SURRENDER 2 16 GE 2 18 tee 2 20 MySono U6 Cart sold separately 2 21 EE IEN 2 22 Optional FUNCIONS ememr 2 22 Chapter 2 Introduction vi Specification Height 75 4mm Width 360mm Depth 291mm Weight more than 4 8kg without battery 2D imaging mode M imaging mode Color Doppler Imaging CDI mode Power Doppler Imaging PDI mode Directional Power Doppler Imaging DPDI mode Pulse Wave PW Spectral Doppler imaging mode Continuous Wave CW Doppler imaging mode Tissue Doppler Imaging TDI mode 3D imaging mode 4D imaging mode Dual modes Combined modes Simultaneous mode Zoom mode 256 8 bits Transmit focusing ma
256. rence is a normal distribution It is laterally symmetrical around 5096 the average and it shows the distance from the average as a deviation The deviation can be represented by Standard Deviation SD or Percentile 5 98 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations 68 396 m 36 m 26 m 6 m m o6 m 26 m 4 36 68 396 95 596 99 7 Figure 5 35 The distribution of the Growth table for the selected number of weeks m Average s Standard Deviation When represented by SD a point near the average indicates a value closer to 0 SD and a point away from the average indicates a value closer to the maximum or minimum value The greater part of the range falls within 3 SD and 1 SD representing 68 3 of the entire range Thus it can be seen that most fetal measurements are tightly clustered around the average value The Percentile represents a point in distribution from between 0 and 100 inclusive Therefore the average point is represented as 50 Percentile As shown in the figure the average point corresponds to 0 SD that is 50 Percentile If a point is in the range between 1 SD and 1 SD it falls within 68 3 of the entire range This means that the point falls in the range between 16 and 84 Further if a point is in the range between 2 SD and 2 SD it falls within 95 5 of the entire range Thus the point falls in the range between 3 and 97 The SD and Percentile are interchangeable Percentile can be used when a
257. roduced by blood vessel wall movement Adjust the Cutoff Frequency to remove doppler signals whose frequency is lower than the cutoff frequency Set to a value between 0 and 3 by pressing the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu E Baseline Rotating the soft menu s dial button 4 clockwise increases the baseline In Color Doppler mode the color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow Based on the Baseline at the middle red indicates the direction and speed of blood flow toward the probe By contrast the blue color indicates the direction and speed of blood flow away from the probe TDI NOTE P This can be used only when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe P For more information on TDI see TDI Mode Selecting this function changes to TDI mode TDI stands for Tissue Doppler Imaging NOTE For more information on other soft menu options and functions refer to the 2D Mode section 419 U6 Power Doppler Mode This mode displays the intensity of blood flow in color within the ROI in the 2D image It is appropriate for examining the presence and amount of blood flow The 2D Mode image is also shown allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the entire image FR 18Hz 13 0cm MI 0 84 2011 10 21 Abdomen C2 8 Gen Tis 0 5 02 43 21 PM G50 120dB FA9 P90 G45 2 50kHz FATIF 1 10 Frame Avg 7 Color Map 1 Sensitivity 10 Balance Harmonic M Line Off Write Zoom 2DiC Live Fi
258. rssi s ECC EETA LE Artery Calculations EE UE Artery Calculations ssc EENeg E lettres UE Vein Calculattons EEN Fetal Echo Calculations EEN Urology Calculations Abdomen Calculations Small Parts Calculations EENEG USCH IEN Musculoskeletal Calculations EENEG 5 86 Pediatric Hips GalculatiOHls scene E EHEPEHHREREPEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEHREREPEEEREREEEETEHEEEHEEEBEEEREERRREE ESA SATEET EEN 5 87 MySonoU6 Operation Manual zoom P M 5 89 VIEWING ET 5 89 Editing Reports EE 5 91 Adding COMMENES eats 5 93 susce seco 5 93 ESOU 5 94 Mee le EE 5 95 eir Toner p 5 95 eege 5 100 Chapter6 Image Management RAS AO o eats iieii atone 6 3 leie TEE 6 6 EE ee 6 6 Bo Lig 6 10 Indicator Saving and Playing UE 6 14 SAWING Mages aE E EEEE EAE n M 6 14 aer L GE 6 15 Transferring and Printing Images Transferring Images EE APTA VIN NCH TED OBS e e EE E S ll 6 18 ace XA 6 18 COIMMPare MOG fe S 6 20 Exanmimage Manage MENi sese oreet eurer einer ert tin tere E ere SE eere eueEnd 6 21 Chapter7 Utilities Utilities eren in EM 7 3 bir C 7 5 tele n m 7 7 POSE IUIS EES 7 9 Monitor Cal 0 Ee RE 7
259. rum is traced automatically This function is enabled in the menu in Spectral Doppler Mode 5 26 1 Select Limited Trace in the measurement menu A bar appears allowing you to specify a measurement area 2 Specify the measurement range P Place the bar at the desired position with the trackball and press the Set button 3 The system traces spectrums within the specified range automatically 4 When Trace is complete the measurement results are displayed on the screen E Manual Trace Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations A spectrum can be traced manually This function is enabled in the menu in Spectral Doppler Mode 1 Select Manual Trace in the measurement menu A measurement cursor appears over a spectrum 2 Trace the spectrum The measuring method is the same as in D Trace 3 When the Trace is complete the measurement results are displayed on the screen E Itemized Measurement In the Measurement menu select an individual item and take a measurement 1 Press the Calculator button after obtaining a desired image 2 Select a desired item in the measurement menu The cursor appears over a spectral waveform 3 Position the cursor and press the Set button 4 The measurement results for the selected item are displayed on the screen The following measurements are taken from doppler spectrums Taking measurements via Auto Calc You can use Auto Calc to m
260. s 5 dial button deletes a part of the curve being traced E Undo Pressing the 5 dial button cancels the last measurement m RAP Rotating the soft menu s 6 dial button adjusts the right atrium pressure level This option is available with the cardiac application only E Apply RAP Press the soft menu s 6 dial button to save the selected RAP value to the report 5 24 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Common Measurement Methods This section provides information on the common measurement methods used for applications Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode In general if you trace a doppler spectrum you can obtain results for various measurement items automatically There are 3 ways to trace a Doppler spectrum In addition you can select a specific item under the measurement menu and take measurements individually without tracing a Doppler spectrum E Auto Trace A spectrum is traced automatically This function is enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral Doppler Mode 1 Press Auto Trace in the measurement menu 2 The system traces a spectrum automatically 3 When the Trace is complete the measurement results are displayed on the screen 5 25 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Things to consider for Doppler Spectrum Auto Trace The state of a Doppler spectrum may affect measurement results Please see the following Causes for Trace Failure f Gain is changed for a Doppler image in the Freez
261. s dial button 3 This option only appears in the menu when Cine playback has been stopped The current frame number in relation to the total number of frames is shown in the menu E Mix Used to specify the rendering mix Rotate the soft menu s dial button 4 to set to a value between O and 100 E Cine Playback Pause Pause or play by pressing the 4 dial button beneath the soft menu E New Cine Press the soft menu s dial button 5 to set a new Cine mode The system returns to the 3D Cine Define screen 4 51 U6 Clear Cine Press the soft menu s dial button 6 to delete the current Cine image This ends 3D Cine 8 0cm M0 46 2011 10 24 U6 Tls0 3 02 56 45 PM Oblique View MPR Mey ka 3D Cine Define Rotate Angle 45 Step Angle 5 Rotate Axis Ii Start Angle 22 End Angle 23 Mix Calculate Figure 4 13 3D Cine 452 Diagnosis Modes 4D Cine The 4D images saved temporarily in the system can be reviewed Press this button to bring up the 4D Cine screen N NOTE You can also press the Freeze button in 4D Mode to execute 4D Cine The cine bar is shown on the screen The cine bar includes the Current Cine Frame Number Total Number of Cine Frames 8 0cm MI 0 46 2011 10 21 Tis 0 3 02 57 31 PM ka 4D Cine Play Mode Start Angle 1 End Angle 64 Speed 100 Cine Playback Figure 4 14 4D Cine SCH NOTE For information on soft menu items in 4D Cine mode refer to 3D Cine
262. s only available in Spectral Doppler Mode You can specify a point in a Spectral Doppler image and trace a curve from that point to calculate the velocity integral value and average velocity of blood flow 1 Press Caliper and select D Trace under soft menu 1 D Trace is shown in the user information area 2 Trace a curve The tracing method is identical to Line Trace 3 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen gt PSV Peak Systolic Velocity gt PI Pulsatility Index gt EDV End Diastolic Velocity gt S D Ratio of PSV to EDV gt RI Resistivity Index gt Vmean Average velocity 5 14 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations The equations used for D Trace measurement are as follows VTI gt V mean Duration of flow pe PSV EDV PSV gt PI PSV EDV Vmean Ay see EDV NOTE If Application under Utility gt Measure Setup gt General gt Caliper is set to Cardiac results for Vmax Vmean PGmax PGmean VTI PHT Acc AccT Dec DecT etc are shown on the screen DTime This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler Mode You can specify two bars ona Spectral Doppler image and calculate the time between them 1 Press Caliper and select D Time under soft menu 1 Time is shown in the user information area 2 Set two bars on the spectrum with the trackball and the Set button 3 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the
263. sampling technique to calculate the frequency or velocity spectrum gt Adjust the baseline or the velocity scale to minimize aliasing A lower frequency probe can also be used to reduce aliasing gt Aliasing is dramatically reduced in CW Spectral Doppler Mode Calculation Equation P Some of the calculation equations used for clinical purposes originate from hypotheses and approximation gt All calculation equations are based on medical reports and articles Human Error gt Human error may occur due to inappropriate use or lack of experience gt This can be minimized through compliance with and thorough understanding of the manuals 54 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Optimization of Measurement Accuracy 2D Mode gt Resolution is in proportion to the frequency of the probe gt Penetration is in inverse proportion to the frequency of the probe gt The highest resolution can be obtained at the focus of the probe where the ultrasound beam is narrowest gt The most accurate measurements can be obtained at the focus depth The accuracy decreases as the distance from the focus increases widening the beam width gt Using the zoom function or minimizing the depth display makes distance or area measurements more accurate MMode gt The accuracy of time measurements can be increased when the sweep velocity and the display format are set to high values P The accuracy of distance measure
264. screen 5 15 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement of Circumference and Area Ellipse This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes You can measure the circumference and area of a circular elliptical object in a 2D image 1 Press Caliper and select Ellipse under soft menu 2 Ellipse is shown in the user information area 2 Usethe trackball and the Set button to specify the diameter axis of the measurement area gt Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button Repositioning Point Instead of pressing the Set button to confirm the point position you can press the Change button to reset it 3 Specify the size of the circle ellipse gt Adjust the size by using the trackball and press the Set button 4 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen The following equation is used for Ellipse measurement 1 A BY Circ 27 A Long axis B Short axis 2 2 2 Area 7 Xa X b a b Axis 5 16 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Trace This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes You can measure the circumference and area of an irregular object in a 2D image 1 Press Caliper and select Trace under soft menu 2 Trace is shown in the user information area 2 Use the trackball and the Set button to specify the start point for tracing over the contour of the
265. se The measurement method is identical to Ellipse 3 When the measurement is finished its result is Shown on the screen The following equation is used for Ellipse measurement Long Short Short 2 2 2 Vost 3 MOD This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes In a 2D image the area of an irregular object and the length of its long axis are obtained to calculate its volume MOD is an abbreviation for Method of Disk 1 Press Caliper and select MOD under soft menu 3 MOD is shown in the user information area 2 Draw a contour you want to measure The measurement method is identical to Trace 3 Measure the length of the long axis The measurement method is identical to Distance 4 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen Editing Curves Before specifying the end point by pressing the Set button you can delete part of the curve being traced by rotating the 5 Delete dial button on the soft menu 5 20 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations es Calculations by Application Press the Calculator button on the control panel Things to note Before Starting Measurement E Register Patient Make sure that the currently registered patient information is correct If the patient is not registered press the Patient button on the control panel For the Patient Information menu and entry method refer to Patient Information in Chapter 3 Starting Di
266. smann GA Unit Information Input Unit Output Unit SD Unit Table Type Range Type sD Value Only Show in Days Cursor Movement for Enter key Right a Cancel Figure 7 42 User Table Unit Information The unit of the selected reference such as Input Output SD etc is displayed Table type Select the table type for the selected reference For the Growth Table SD Standard Deviation is displayed P Range Type Set the Min and Max values of the selected reference and display them in a table The SD value varies according to the range selected by the user gt Value Only Only the measurement values entered by the user are displayed regardless of the range of Min Max and SD Other P Show In Days When the checkbox is selected the table unit is changed from wd week day to d day P Cursor Movement for the Enter key Specify the direction of cursor movement when the Enter key on the keyboard is pressed while a table is being edited Select from Right Down and Edit 7 71 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Adding Reference Equation If a reference appears in an equation the following should be entered Equation Enter a reference equation Use the measurement calculator shown in the lower right corner Input Value Ranges Enter the minimum Low and maximum High ranges for the selected reference Tolerance Information Select the tolerance from w or d Editor A EFW Hadlock1 AC FL
267. soft menu Text 1 to 10 can be entered or edited from Text Edit E Input Input the selected text by pressing the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu 67 68 MySonoU6 Operation Manual m Edit Pressing the soft menus dial button 4 brings up the Text Edit screen Type new text into text fields 1 to 10 or edit existing text Click OK to finish Click Cancel to cancel Text2 Text4 Text6 Text8 Text 10 TEXT TEXT TEXT TEXT TEXT Cancel Figure 6 3 Text Edit Image Management Autotext This function allows you to enter text automatically by using an abbreviation In this way you can enter text easily and quickly When Autotext is enabled the autotext list appears on the screen 2011 10 23 0001 FR 16Hz 15 0cm MI 0 81 2011 10 23 Doe Jane 23y0m C2 8 Gen Tis 0 2 09 36 47 AM G50115dB FA9 P90 fag FUN GDA Font Size 11 Home Position Load Default Size Load Figure 6 4 Autotext List NOTE Enable disable Autotext under Utility Setup Annotate Text Setup For more information please refer to Chapter 7 Utilities Ending Text Input Mode Press the soft menu s dial button 6 or the keyboard s Text key again Or press the Exit button on the control panel 6 9 UG BodyMarker Places BodyMarkers on top of images This function can be useful when the diagnosis area is differentiated or displayed 2011 10 23 0001 FR 32Hz 13 0cm MI 0 54 2011 10 23 Doe Jane 23y0m A
268. splayed under Abbreviation and Full Word at the bottom of the screen 2 Modify the word in the Abbreviation and Full Word columns The abbreviation list will be modified in real time gt Adding a word 1 Clickthe New button 2 Enter the words that you wish to add in the Abbreviation and Full Word fields at the bottom of the screen The word will be added to the abbreviated word list gt Deleting a word 1 Usethe trackball and the Set button to select a word to delete from the list An abbreviation for the selected word and its full version are displayed under Abbreviation and Full Word at the bottom of the screen 2 Clickthe Delete button The following warning message will appear 3 To delete the selected word click OK The selected word will be removed from the abbreviated word list Click Cancel to cancel gt Setting word input delay time Specify the time taken by the system to automatically convert an abbreviation into a full word and display it on the screen Set the delay time from 0 1 to 5 seconds in Autotext Delay Time at the bottom of the screen 7 27 EE MySonoU6 Operation Manual Abbreviation Full Word 2 Chamber 2 Vessel Cord 3 Vessel Cord 4 Chamber Aneurysm Abdominal Circumference Adrenal Amniotic Fluid Adnexa Anterior Aorta Aorta Short Axis Apical 2 Chamber Apical 4 Chamber Apical Long Axis ee Abbreviation 2C Full Word 2 Chamber Delete Autotext Delay Time 0 5 E Sec Figure 7
269. ss Available Gauges 16G E Installation 1 Fill the sheath with ultrasound gel and insert the probe 2 Mount the adapter on the probe and then insert the needle 9 36 7 OS
270. ss are displayed on the screen Slice Number Total Number of Slices is shown at the bottom part of each slice image The currently selected slice image is indicated by an orange contour 458 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes N NOTE Available options are Calculator Caliper Text and Indicator MSV Mode Soft Menu E Slice Thickness Set the cut depth of images Set to 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 or 5 0mm by rotating the 1 dial button beneath the soft menu Depending on your selection the number of slices and pages will vary NOTE Slice thickness is the slice interval within the volume data and does not refer to actual anatomical locations E Selected Slice Select a slice image to observe Use the 2 dial button on the soft menu to select a slice The selected slice will be highlighted with orange borders E Page Change If there are multiple pages of images then you can use the soft menu s dial button 3 to change the page E RotateX Y Z Rotates the image in the direction of the selected axis Use soft menu dial buttons 4 5 and 6 to rotate the image in the direction of the X Y and Z axes respectively E Orientation Dot Click the soft menu s dial button 4 to turn this option on or off When this is on a dot appears at the center of the image B Init Press the soft menus dial button 5 This returns you to MSV mode s initial screen E Next Page Press the soft menu dial button 6 This brings up the
271. stance cm mm Duct Art All Distance cm mm LA Diam All Distance cm mm RA Diam All Distance cm mm Sedis RV Diam All Distance cm mm IVS All Distance cm mm LVIDd All Distance cm mm LVIDs All Distance cm mm LVPW All Distance cm mm HrtC All Distance cm mm ThC All Distance cm mm 5 69 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Method Unit CTAR All D Continuous measurement ThD ap Distance cm mm ThD trans Distance cm mm HrtD ap Distance cm mm HrtD trans Distance cm mm ThA Area cm mm HrtA Area cm mm Fetal M mode All M Continuous measurement cm mm IVSd M Distance cm mm LVIDd M Distance cm mm Baler sche LVPWd M Distance cm mm IVSs M Distance cm mm LVIDs M Distance cm mm LVPWs M Distance cm mm RVDd M Distance cm mm Fetal HR M PW Heart Rate bpm E CTAR Cardio Thorax Area Ratio This measurement is for comparing the sizes of the fetus chest and heart The comparison is made by obtaining the ThD ap ThD trans HrtD ap and HrtD trans values CTAR HrtD ap x HrtD trans ThD apx ThD trans 5 0 x100 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Doppler Measurement Menu General Fetal Echo MPA Duct A gt Duct Venosus gt Asc Aorta gt Dsc Aorta MV TV gt IVC PLI gt Tei Index Fetal HR Figure 5 18 Doppler Fetal Echo Measurement M
272. stands for Tissue Doppler Wave E Spectrum Type Select Spectrum Type Set between Type 1 and 3 by rotating the soft menu s dial button NOTE For more information on other soft menu options and functions refer to the 2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode sections 4 28 Diagnosis Modes CW Spectral Doppler Mode CW stands for Continuous Wave This mode displays the blood flow speed and direction at a specific blood vessel location within a specific time frame Unlike PW Spectral Doppler Mode it does not provide Sample Volume NOTE CW Spectral Doppler mode is an optional feature of this product This dial button can be used with the Phased Array or Static CW probes U6 FR 50Hz 16 0cm MI 0 05 2011 10 21 Cardiac P2 4 Res Tis 0 8 02 48 24 PM G50 118dBiFAO P95 G65 F1 P95 17 19 kKHz 113 00 mmi0 iy d PN lj t wl Wiel yyw i t mit 4 NON du ak Val n Ja NU ul MUN ul j MAN f A 1 24 Angle 10 Steps BaseLine Dopplerinvert Off Angle 60 Steps AutoGalc Off Figure 4 6 CW Spectral Doppler Mode Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode This mode can be used only if the Phased Array probe is used The 2D Mode image is also shown allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area within the entire image Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode This mode is only available with a Static CW Probe The 2D image is not displayed 4 29 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Starting amp Ending CW Spectral Doppler Mode
273. stimating acoustic output values over the range of possible system operating conditions and pulse voltages Inaccuracies in laboratory measurements are related to differences in hydrophone calibration and performance positioning alignment and digitization tolerances and variability among test operators The conservative assumptions of the output estimation algorithms of linear propagation at all depths through a 0 3dB cm MHz attenuated medium are not taken into account in calculation of the accuracy estimate displayed Neither linear propagation nor uniform attenuation at the 0 3dB cm MHz rate occur in water tank measurements or in most tissue paths in the body In the body different tissues and organs have dissimilar attenuation characteristics In water there is almost no attenuation In the body and particularly in water tank measurements non linear propagation and saturation losses occur as pulse voltages increase The display accuracy estimates take into account the variability ranges of probes and systems inherent acoustic output modeling errors and measurement variability Display accuracy estimates are measured according to AIUM measurement standards but not based on errors caused during the measurment They are also independent of the effects of non linear loss on the measured values Control Effects Control affecting the indices As various system controls are adjusted the Tl and MI values may change This will be most appar
274. surement Menu When the measurements for the selected items are complete the measurements and gestational age are displayed on the screen The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement Measured items are automatically recorded in a report HC AC FL Lat Vent CEREB CM NF OFD HUM APD TAD EFW gt AFI MVP Mid Cereb A gt Umbilical A gt Lt Uterine A gt Rt Uterine A Fetal HR Figure 5 4 General OB Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit BPD All Distance cm mm HC All Circumference or automatic calculation AC All Circumference or automatic emn calculation FL All Distance cm mm Lat Vent All Distance cm mm CEREB All Distance cm mm CM All Distance cm mm NF All Distance cm mm 5 35 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Method Unit OFD Distance cm mm Cervix L Distance cm mm HUM Distance cm mm APD Distance cm mm TAD Distance cm mm EFW Distance cm mm Q1 Distance cm mm Q2 Distance cm mm Q3 Distance cm mm Q4 Distance cm mm Circumference cm mm Auto Trace Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace hd comb A PSV PW Velocity cm s m s Umbilical A EDV PW Velocity cm s m s e StA All Calculation after Area Measurement Rt Uter
275. surgical applications a disinfected probe must be used with sterile gel and a sterile pyrogen free sheath gt Ifthe sterile sheath becomes compromised during neurosurgical applications involving a patient with Creutzfeldt Jakob disease the probe cannot be successfully sterilized by any disinfection method P Some sheaths contain natural rubber latex and talc which can cause allergic reactions in some individuals Please refer to the FDA Medical Alert released on March 29 1991 1 Put on sterile gloves Unpack the sheath and fill it with acoustic coupling gel 2 Insert the probe into the sheath and pull the latex tip to cover the probe completely If possible cover the probe cable as well 3 Ensure that there is no air bubbles within the ultrasound gel If necessary secure the sheath to the probe and the probe cable 4 Dispose of the sheath after use 9 9 SS MySonoU6 Operation Manual Probe Safety Precautions CAUTION P Do not apply mechanical shock to the probe P Do not place the probe cable on the floor where the cable can be run over by equipment wheels etc Do not apply excessive force to bend or pull the cable P Do not immerse the probe into any inappropriate substances such as alcohol bleach ammonium chloride and hydrogen peroxide P Do not expose the probe to temperatures of 50 C or higher The probe can easily be damaged by improper use or by coming into contact with certain chemical
276. t and maintenance refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance 33 WO MySonoU6 Operation Manual Powering On Press the On Off button when the power is off Booting begins and the product logo appears on the screen When booting is completed the 2D mode screen appears in End Exam status N CAUTION Before starting the diagnosis you must register the patient information Powering Off Press the On Off button while using the system to initiate shutdown CAUTION Holding down the On Off button for four seconds or longer forces the product to power off and might cause hard disk damage NOTE P Do not press keys on the keyboard or press a button while booting is in progress Doing so may cause the system to malfunction gt If you turn on the power after a forced shutdown the system might turn on and then immediately turn off This is one of the characteristics of the Intel PC main board and not a system error 34 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Monitor and Audio You can adjust monitor and audio settings while performing a diagnosis Monitor Brightness Adjustment Use the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard to adjust the brightness of the monitor Press amp to decrease brightness and to increase it Volume Adjustment Use the up and down arrow keys on the keyboard to adjust the volume Press 7 to increase volume and 4 to decrease it These controls are used to adjust the Doppler sound level while in Spectr
277. t and right if Scan Area is not at 100 E TGC Time Gain Compensation Use the TGC sliders on the control panel In general ultrasound penetration gets weaker with depth TGC can be used to compensate for this effect 44 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes The product provides six TGC sliders for varying depths allowing you to adjust Gain by area Among the six sliders the top slider represents the shallowest area while the lower sliders represent the deeper ones Move the slider to the right to increase Gain brightening the image E Depth Use the Depth button on the control panel to adjust the scanning depth of an image Pressing the top part of the button decreases the depth and the bottom part of the button increases the depth The allowable range for adjustment varies with the selected probe E Focus Use the Focus button on the control panel to adjust the focus point Pressing the top part of the button brings the focus point up E Zoom Used to zoom in on or out from the image Usage instructions are as follows 1 Press Zoom Press the top part of the button to zoom in and the bottom part of the button to zoom out The current position of the zoom box is shown in the zoom navigation box which is located on the left side of the screen 2 Reposition the zoom box with the trackball Examine the image in its zoomed in out state Continuing to press the appropriate part of the button zooms in on or out from the image ev
278. t be used for longer than 20 minutes Must not be used for longer than 25 minutes Oo gt m Must not be used for longer than 30 minutes Must not be used for longer than 50 minutes Blank Untested DO NOT USE 9 16 Chapter 9 Probes The following is information about the manufacturers or Distributors of detergents disinfectants and ultrasound gels Product Manufacturer or Distributor Telephone number Aquasonics Parker Co 1 800 631 8888 USA 1 800 445 6741 USA Cidex CICO 1 319 656 4447 Worldwide 1 800 445 6741 USA gan SREER 41 319 656 4447 Worldwide Glgasept AF S amp M Schulke amp Mayr Co 44 114 254 3500 UK Gigasept FF S amp M Schulke amp Mayr Co 44 114 254 3500 UK Isopropyl alcohol 70 Local drugstore None Klenzyme Steris Co 1 800 548 4873 USA xs 1 800 445 6741 USA MENSIS dads 41 319 656 4447 Worldwide Metrizyme Metrex Research Corp 1 800 841 1428 USA Milton Procter amp Gamble Australia Pty Ltd 61 1800 028 280 Australia 1 800 526 3867 USA Nuclean National Diagnostics Co 44 0 148 264 6020 UK Omnicide Cottrell Ltd 1 800 843 3343 USA Sani cloth PDI Nice Pak Products Co 1 914 365 1602 USA Sekusept Extra Henkel Hygiene GmbH 49 0211 797 0 Germany Sporox II Sultan Chemist Inc 1 800 637 8582 USA 1 800 445 6741 USA T Spray SEN 41 319 656 4447 Worldwide Virkon Ante
279. tage will also decrease MI E Sec Width A narrower 2D mode sector width in Color imaging will increase color frame rate The TI will increase MI will not change If pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed Doppler will remain as the primary mode and the TI change will be small M mode and Doppler Controls E Speed M mode and Doppler sweep speed adjustments will not affect the MI When M mode sweep speed changes TI changes E Simultaneous and Update Methods Use of combination modes affects both the TI and MI through the combination of pulse types During simultaneous mode the TI is additive During auto update and duplex the TI will display the dominant pulse type The displayed MI will be from the mode with the largest peak pressure E Sample Volume Depth When Doppler sample volume depth is increased the Doppler PRF may automatically decrease A decrease in PRF will decrease the TI The system may also automatically decrease the pulse voltage to remain below the system maximum A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI 1 25 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Doppler CW M mode and Color Imaging Controls When a new imaging mode is selected both the TI and the MI will change to default settings Each mode has a corresponding pulse repetition frequency and maximum intensity point In combined or simultaneous modes the TI is the sum of the contributions from the modes enabled and MI is the MI for the focal zone and
280. taken In addition the only available button while in the SonoReport screen is the Exit button 5 89 SSI MySonoU6 Operation Manual 2011 10 23 U6 Ultrasound Report OB 02 29 56 PM Institution Diag Physician Ref Physician Sonographer ID 2011 10 20 0002 Exam Date 2011 10 23 HR Name Doe Jane BirthDate 9 2 Gender Female Age 23 Height Weight BSA Description Accession LMP Estab Due Date GA LMP AUA EDD LMP EDD AUA EFW Author Hadlock2 BPD AC FL EFW GA EFW Pctl EFW SD EFW w6d 15d 71 0 87 0 gt 23w Patient Info Comment Graph Export Next App Figure 5 29 Report 5 90 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Editing Reports Clicking Edit while in the Ultrasound Report screen enables editing the report You can then edit the measurement results or change the way that the measured values are displayed Clicking the screen s OK button or pressing the control panel s Exit button saves the changes and closes the editing screen If you wish to close the edit screen without saving your changes click Cancel Modify Measurements Change the measured values using the trackball and the Set button The values will then be displayed in grey indicating that they have been modified Measurement Display Method The product allows you to measure one measurement item several times However only the first three measurement results are saved in a report When taking measurements for the s
281. te dots dashes diagonal mode system settings white radial bands or flashes in lines or diagonal lines near or system reset the centerlines of the image the center of the image Brief flashes in the For linear imaging probes displayed or recorded white vertical bands image sometimes more pronounced on the sides of the image M Increase in the image White dots dashes diagonal background noise or whiteM lines or increase in image mode lines background noise Color Color flashes radial or vertical Color flashes dots dashes bands increase in background or changes in the color noise noise or changes in color level image Doppler Horizontal lines in the spectral Vertical lines in the spectral display or tones abnormal noise in the audio or both display popping type noise in the audio or both 1 ESD caused by discharging of electric charge build up on insulated surfaces or persons 2 RFenergy from RF transmitting equipment such as portable phones hand held radios wireless devices commercial radio and TV and so on 3 Conducted interference on powerlines or connected cables caused by other equipment such as switching power supplies electrical controls and natural phenomena such as lightning 1 14 Chapter 1 Safety A medical device can either generate or receive electromagnetic interference The EMC standards describe tests for both emitted and received interference Samsung M
282. tective items and follow all safety instructions in order to minimize the risk of infection among patients 9 10 Chapter 9 Probes PRI Electric Shocks The probe uses electrical energy If it touches conductive materials there are risks of electric shocks to the patient or the user WARNING P The equipment should regularly be checked for short circuits by Samsung Medison s service department P Do not immerse the probe into liquid P Do not drop the probe or apply mechanical shocks P Inspect the housing strain relief lens and seal for damage and check for any functional problem before and after each use P Do not apply excessive force to twist pull or bend the probe cable gt The power protection fuse protects the probe and the product from excess current If the power monitoring protection circuit detects excess current it immediately shuts off the current to the probe in order to prevent the probe surface from overheating and to restrict the ultrasound power output P The temperature of the product for making contact with patients is limited under 43 C The ultrasound power output AP amp l is in compliance with US FDA standards 9 11 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe Using an inappropriate cleaning or sterilizing agent may damage the product WARNING P Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting probes P Inspect the housing strai
283. ted Slice Not available if Contour or Multi Contour was selected from the oblique view mode menu E Slice Thickness Use the 3 dial button on the soft menu to adjust the gap between the parallel lines Available only if Multi Parallel or Multi Plumb has been selected from the oblique view mode menu E RotateX Y Z Rotates the image in the direction of the selected axis Use soft menu dial buttons 4 5 and 6 to rotate the image in the direction of the X Y and Z axes respectively E Auto Increase Click the soft menus dial button 4 to turn this option on or off Turning this option on automatically increases the number of lines in Multi Line Multi Contour Multi Parallel or Multi Plumb to a maximum of four 4 63 4 64 UG Orientation Dot Press the soft menu s dial button 5 to turn this function on or off When this is on a dot appears at the center of the image Next Page Press the soft menu dial button 6 This brings up the next soft menu page Position Used to adjust the post curve position Use the soft menu s dial button 2 and set to a value between 0 and 100 Bias Used to set the post curve bias Use the soft menu s dial button 4 and set to a value between 100 and 100 Prev Page Press the soft menu dial button 6 This brings up the previous soft menu page 8 0cm MI 0 46 2011 10 21 Tis 0 3 03 02 38 PM ka Oblique View 3 mm 30mm Rotate Line Rotate X Rotate Y Rotate Z Orientatio
284. tensity control directly affect acoustic intensity There are different ranges of allowable intensity or output based on your selection Selecting the correct range of acoustic intensity for the application is one of the priorities required during any exam For example peripheral vascular intensity levels are not recommended for fetal exams Some systems automatically select the proper range for a particular procedure while others require manual selection Ultimately the user bears the responsibility for proper clinical use This Samsung Medison system provides both automatic and user definable settings Output has direct impact on acoustic intensity Once the application has been established the output control can be used to increase or decrease the intensity output The output control allows you to select intensity levels less than the defined maximum Prudent use dictates that you select the lowest output intensity consistent with good image quality 1 19 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Indirect Controls The indirect controls are those that have an indirect effect on acoustic intensity These controls affect imaging mode pulse repetition frequency focus depth pulse length and probe selection The choice of imaging mode determines the nature of the ultrasound beam 2D mode is a scanning mode Doppler is a stationary or unscanned mode A stationary ultrasound beam concentrates energy ona single location A moving or scanned ultrasound beam
285. ter value 744 Chapter 7 Utilities Services Alias IP Address AE Title Port No Transfer Mode Retry Interval Connect Timeo Maximum Retries Printer Setup Color Grayscale Medium Type PAPER Format 4x1 Film Size 8INX10IN Orientation PORTRAIT Destination MAGAZINE Magnification REPLICATE Smoothing Type Border Density BLACK Priority Copies 1 99 Empty Density BLACK Min Density Configuration Info Max Density Figure 7 25 DICOM Configuration Print 7 45 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Worklist Server Information Select WORKLIST under Services Configure the Modality Worklist Service using DICOM E Show Worklist first when the patient screen opens When you check this checkbox the Worklist window appears when you press the control panel s Patient button Otherwise the Study Information window appears E Update Method Specify the update method for Worklist gt Only on User Request Update only when asked by the user To update a worklist in the Search tab on the Patient Information screen select Worklist for Search Source and then click Search gt On Startup and Every Updates the worklist when the system boots up and then regularly at specified intervals E Scheduled Station AE Title Specify the range of AE Titles to retrieve from the Worklist server in a hospital gt Any Retrieve the patient list stored in all AE Titles in the server P This S
286. terday E Fetus If there are multiple fetuses identify each one Up to four fetuses A B C D can be specified E Exam No Up to eight exam numbers can be entered for each date An exam number appears next to the Fetus field E New Data Delete all measurement data entered for all exams and enter new measurement data E Clear Cancel entering the measurement data 3 30 E Insert Complete entering the measurement data E Page Browse Use the gt gt or lt lt buttons to scroll through pages E View Switch to the View screen View gt gt Exam Date 0000 100 00 Fetal Biometry TAD SL TTD APTD MAD APTDxTTD Thc View Screen Fetal Cranium CEREB OOD IOD cM NT NF Lat Vent NB HW Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Fetus A H Fetal Long Bones HUM ULNA TIB RAD FIB CLAY Vertebral EFW Figure 3 19 Measure Data Insert em 14 8 Fetal Others Foot Ear MP Lt Renal L Lt Renal AP Rt Renal L Rt Renal AP Pelvis New Data Clear Insert gt gt Click View gt gt on the screen to display the View screen You can view the measurements entered or save them in an Excel file The symbol next to the Exam Date indicates that the data is the current measurement data E Package Select a measurement package to display on the screen E Refresh Update the measurement data Newly calculated measurements or the measurements entered are added 3
287. the current scale and is only available in PW Spectral Doppler mode HPRF stands for High PRF gt Activating HPRF Increasing the scale at a specific depth to a certain point automatically activates HPRF A The Phantom Gate will appear on the D Line at a position higher than the sample volume Once HPRF starts PRF does not increase even if you increase the scale value 424 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes gt Finishing HPRF While HPRF is in use decrease the scale value by one step to finish HPRF Here PRF value becomes the maximum value in the current PW Spectral Doppler mode gt Moving Sample Volume To move the Sample Volume position in the D Only state the system calculates PRF values and the Phantom Gate position and updates them on the PW Spectral Doppler image HPRF is terminated when HPRF cannot be activated When Sample Volume is moved in the 2D Only state the PRF values don t change CAUTION P While in a zoomed in state the phantom gate position can move outside the 2D image area gt Make sure that sample volume and Phantom Gate are not placed together in the measuring area If more than two Sample Volumes are located in the vessels all Doppler components will appear in the spectrum causing noise PW Spectral Doppler Mode Soft Menu NOTE The soft menu referred in this manual can be accessed from default settings at Utility gt Menu Edit The soft menu in PW mode consists of the following
288. the C button on the control panel 2D PD CW Mode Power Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously This mode is available only with certain probes In Power Doppler Mode press the CW dial button on the control panel Or in CW Spectral Doppler Mode press the PD button on the control panel 4 35 MySonoU6 Operation Manual 2D C M Mode Color Doppler Mode and M Mode are displayed simultaneously In Color Doppler Mode press the M button on the control panel Or in M mode press the C button on the control panel This mode is enabled for specific diagnostic applications with specific probes only 2D C Live Mode 2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously In 2D mode select the soft menu s dial button 5 2D C Live Changing Combined Mode Format E Changing the Active Image Mode Press the Set button on the control panel The current active image mode D Only or 2D Only is displayed above the menu on the screen In Combined Mode more than two image modes are used at the same time The image mode currently in use is called the Active Image Mode For example if Sample Volume is moved with the trackball in 2D C PW Mode PW Spectral Doppler Mode becomes the current active image mode Because the menu and button options vary depending on the active image mode you can use the Set button to change the active image mode Note that the active image mode cannot be chang
289. the adapter onto the probe 9 31 Be MySonoUG Operation Manual 3 Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor 4 Install the needle into the needle guide 932 EVN4 9 Biopsy Guide E Biopsy Specifications Chapter 9 Probes Model name BP KIT 024 Biopsy Adapter 1EA Component Sheath 2EA Material Stainless Available Gauges 16G E Installation 1 Fill the sheath with the ultrasound gel and place the sheath all the way down to the adapter And then tie with a rubber band 4 Install the needle into the needle guide for use MySonoU6 Operation Manual 3DC2 6 Biopsy Guide E Biopsy Specifications Model name BP KIT 026 Biopsy Adapter 1EA component Needle Guide 24 EA Material Acetal Copolymer Available Gauges 16G 18G 20G 22G E Installation 1 Place the biopsy adapter onto the probe em O TS Ep E 1 E _ S 2 Fill the sheath with ultrasound gel and insert the probe Chapter 9 Probes amm 3 Mount the needle guide on the adapter 4 Install the needle into the needle guide for use 9 35 3D4 9 Biopsy Guide oUO Operation Manual E Biopsy Specifications Model name BP KIT 027 Adapter 1 EA Component Cleaning Brush 5EA Instruction 1EA Material Stainle
290. tic Stenosis TGA Transposition of the Great Arteries Height Weight BSA HR BP Figure 3 7 Study Information Ped Echo 3 16 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Fetal Heart In Category select Fetal Heart Enter fetal heart related information LMP Number of Fetuses Height GA LMP Weight EDD LMP BSA Estab DueDate HR Ovul Date BP Figure 3 8 Study Information Vascular Vascular In Category select Vascular Enter vascular information E Additional Information Select the applicable check boxes Smoker Hypertension Diabetes Hyperlipidemia Family History Surgery History Dizziness Headache Migraine Stroke Peripheral Neuropathy Height Weight BSA HR BP Figure 3 9 Study Information Vascular MySonoU6 Operation Manual TCD In Category select TCD Enter additional information for Transcranial Doppler TCD E Additional Information Select the applicable check boxes Smoker Hypertension Diabetes Family History Dizziness Vertigo Migraine Headache Diplopia Dysarthria Dysphagia Tinnitus Stroke Peripheral Neuropathy TIA Numbness Paralysis Height Weight BSA HR BP 3 18 Figure 3 10 Study Information TCD Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis m Urology In Category select Urology Enter additional information for Urology E PSA Enter the Prostate Specific Antigen P
291. tion Manual E Bias Used to change the bias of the post curve selected under Select Set to a value between 100 and 100 by rotating the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu E Zoom Use the soft menu s dial button 4 to set the zoom to a value between 25 and 400 E Prev Page Press the soft menu dial button 6 to moves to the previous page Display Select Display from the menu and then select an appropriate format E 2D Displays axial sagittal and coronal plane images 2D mode is for diagnosis using multi planar images only Using the soft menu s Full option lets you examine the images in more detail E 2D 3D Axial sagittal or coronal plane images are displayed on the screen together with 3D images Use the control panel s Dual button to activate the 2D 3D mode E ROI3D Axial sagittal or coronal plane images are displayed on the screen together with 3D images In this display format you can manipulate the ROI box E Fixed 3D Axial sagittal or coronal plane images are displayed on the screen together with the 3D image from inside the ROI box that was set up in ROI 3D mode ROI is not indicated 448 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes Ref Image Select A B or C as the reference image The direction of the arrow changes depending on your selection 3D Orientation Select 0 90 180 or 270 The coordinate system rotates in the direction of the Z axis from the 3D Reference Coordinate System VCE
292. to the Adapter Pp SRM Ws m Be MySonoUG Operation Manual 3 Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor 9 26 C2 5 Biopsy Guide Metal E Biopsy Specifications Chapter 9 Probes Model name BP KIT 042 Biopsy Bracket 1EA Needle Guide 16G 6EA Component Needle Guide 18G 6 EA Needle Guide 20G 6 EA Needle Guide 22G 6EA Material Stainless Steel Available Gauges 16G 18G 20G 22G E Installation 1 Mount the adapter onto the probe 7 P m Be MySonoUG Operation Manual 3 Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor 9 28 Chapter 9 Probes C2 8 Biopsy Guide E Biopsy Specifications Model name BP KIT 035 Biopsy Bracket 1EA component Needle Guide 24 EA Material Acetal Copolymer Available Gauges 16G 18G 20G 22G E Installation 1 Mount the adapter onto the probe Se Eu sch EE EN wl 2 de SE t Be MySonoUG Operation Manual 3 Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor 9 30 Chapter 9 Probes m LN5 12 Biopsy Guide E Biopsy Specifications BP KIT 040 Biopsy Adapter 1EA 16Ga disposable needle guide probe cover KIT 8EA 18Ga disposable needle guide probe cover KIT 8EA 22Ga disposable needle guide probe cover KIT 8EA Acetal Copolymer 16G 18G 22G E Installation 1 Mount
293. ultrasound system shows the needle which penetrates through the skin surface and veins along with the examination location minimizing the risk to the patient Biopsy Kit Components The biopsy kit consists of the adapter needle guide and needle The components vary depending on the probe type The components and accessories can be purchased from Samsung Medison Biopsy Adapter Figure 9 2 Biopsy Kit Components gt Adapter Secures the needle guide to the probe tightly gt Needle Guide Guides the angle direction of the needle so that it can reach the examination location accurately It also secures the needle so that the needle is not loose gt Needle This is the needle that is inserted into the patient s body P Sheath Prevents the probe and adapter from getting soiled by any unwanted substances during the examination blood and other bodily fluids P Gel The space between the probe and the sheath is filled with the ultrasound gel to obtain images of the best quality 9 20 Chapter 9 Probes Using the Biopsy Kit WARNING gt Verify the condition of the biopsy needle before use Do not use a bent biopsy needle P The biopsy needle may bend during tissue penetration The precise location of the needle must be checked by monitoring the echo generated from the needle P Never use the biopsy kit to biopsy prostate tissue Before Using Biopsy Kit Ultrasonographic scanning using the
294. um trace Axillary V Vmax Velocity cm s m s Brachial V Cephalic V Basilic V ini Radial V Ulnar V Auto Trace Doppler spectrum trace Limited Trace Doppler spectrum trace Manual Trace Doppler spectrum trace General Vmax Velocity cm s m s Dur T Time ms Vesl Dist Distance cm mm Vesl Area Area cm mm Vol Flow Auto Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow D Automatic calculation ml m Vol Flow TAMV Doppler spectrum trace cm s m s Vesl Area Area cm mm Vesl Dist Distance cm mm HR M PW Heart Rate bpm 5 68 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Fetal Echo Calculations The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement In addition measurement items are similar to those of cardiac calculation Measured items are automatically recorded in a report NOTE P For information on basic measurement methods refer to the Basic Measurement and Common Measurement Methods sections in this chapter P For references on measurement items see the Reference Manual Part 2 General Measurement Menu Doppler Fetal Echo L Vol Simpson 2D Echo gt CTAR Fetal HR Figure 5 17 General Fetal Echo Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit LVEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml LVESV A2C All Dist 20 ml LV Vol Simpson LVEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml LVESV A4C All Dist 20 ml Asc Ao All Distance cm mm MPA Diam All Di
295. urement method 3 When a new cursor appears measure the inner wall diameter of the vessel that is under stenosis 4 Calculate 96StD with the following equation 96StD Outer Distance Inner Distance Outer Distance x 100 M Distance This is a basic measurement that is only available in M Mode You can specify two points in an M image and measure the distance elapsed time and velocity between them 1 Select M Distance under Flexible soft menu 1 M Distance is shown in the user information area 2 You can specify two points and measure the straight distance between them The measurement method is identical to Distance 3 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on the screen 5 12 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations D Velocity This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler Mode You can specify two points in a Spectral Doppler image and measure the distance between them and the velocity at each point to calculate the change in speed change in time and acceleration N NOTE In a Spectral Doppler image the X and Y axes represent time and velocity respectively 1 Press Caliper and select D Velocity under soft menu 1 D Velocity is shown in the user information area 2 You can specify two points and measure the straight distance between them The measurement method is identical to Distance 3 When the measurement is finished its result is shown on th
296. urn AutoCalc on or off If itis turned on Doppler Trace is performed and its results are displayed Up to 6 calculations can be selected under Utility gt Setup gt AutoCalc If it is turned on the Mean Trace button is enabled For information on selecting calculations refer to the Setting Measurements section in Chapter 7 Utilities CAUTION The measurements done by Auto Trace under Measure and Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace Automatic Calculator may be different from each other This is because the algorithms for these two methods are different It is recommended to use Auto Trace under Measure for more accurate measurement 4 26 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes Things to Consider for Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace 1 Aliasing occurs because PRF is too low in comparison to the image speed or the spectrum is clustered around the baseline because PRF is too high 2 Peak is indistinctive or intermittent such as in Spectral waveforms for veins 3 Meaningful spectrum distinction becomes difficult because Doppler Gain is set too high or too low 4 An index is displayed during the transition time after Sample Volume is moved with the Trackball 5 The major spectral signals are cut off because Doppler Wall Filter is set too high 6 Peak Trace is interrupted due to abnormal Doppler noise or artifacts Heart rate is above approximately 140 bpm If any of the above apply Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace may not produc
297. use the potential for local zone heating to be less than the thermal index displays Scanned modes versus unscanned modes of operation affect the thermal index For scanned modes heating tends to be near the surface for unscanned modes the potential for heating tends to be deeper in the focal zone Always limit ultrasound exposure time Do not rush the exam Ensure that the indices are kept to a minimum and that exposure time is limited without compromising diagnostic sensitivity 1221 MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Mechanical Index MI Display Mechanical bioeffects are threshold phenomena that occur when a certain level of output is exceeded The threshold level varies however with the type of tissue The potential for mechanical bioeffects varies with peak pressure and ultrasound frequency The MI accounts for these two factors The higher the MI value the greater the likelihood of mechanical bioeffects occurring However there is no specific MI value that means that a mechanical effect will actually occur The MI should be used as a guide for implementing the ALARA principle E Thermal Index TI Display The Tl informs the user about the potential for temperature increase occuring at the body surface within body tissue or at the point of focus of the ultrasound beam on bone The TI is an estimate of the temperature increase in specific body tissues The actual amount of any temperature rise is influenced by factors such as tissu
298. used for measuring reverse cardiac blood flow P As PISA Radius or PISA Alias Vel measurements require Velocity values you have to select color display for Velocity or Vel Var in C Mode For more information see the Color Doppler Mode section in Chapter 4 Diagnosis Mode P Tissue Doppler can be measured in TDI Mode 542 Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations Adult Echo Chamber Measurement Menu System Pediatric Valve Cardiac LV 2D gt LY Vol Simpson gt LV Mass gt LA RV 2D gt RA gt Aorta HR Figure 5 6 Adult Echo Chamber Measurement Menu Measurement Menul Item Mode Method Unit All LVd 2D All Continuous measurement IVSd All Distance cm mm LVIDd All Distance cm mm LVPWd All Distance cm mm LV 2D All LVs 2D All Continuous measurement IVSs All Distance cm mm LVIDs All Distance cm mm LVPWs All Distance cm mm All LV M M Continuous measurement IVSd M Distance cm mm LVIDd M Distance cm mm LVPWd M Distance cm mm LV M IVSs M Distance cm mm LVIDs M Distance cm mm LVPWs M Distance cm mm LVET M Time ms LVPEP M Time ms 543 Ss MySonoU6 Operation Manual Measurement Menul Item Method Unit LVEDV A4C Dist 20 ml LVESV A4C Dist 20 ml LVEDV A2C Dist 20 ml LVESV A2C Dist 20 ml LV Vol Simpson LVEDV A4C AL Dist 20 ml LVES
299. ved exam screen you can perform measurements or enter text BodyMarkers or indicators E Review Exam The selected exam appears on the screen Double clicking a stored image in the thumbnail area on the right side of the screen retrieves the image and displays the date when the exam is reviewed Exam Reviewed and the stored image information In the retrieved exam screen you can perform measurements or enter text BodyMarkers or indicators 324 Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis Viewing Exam Select exam s and then click Review on the screen Switch to the SONOVIEW screen SCH NOTE For instructions on using SONOVIEW refer to Chapter 6 Image Management Deleting Exam After selecting an exam press Delete on the screen All images from the exam will be deleted However an exam in progress or a locked exam cannot be deleted Ze NOTE Once deleted exams cannot be recovered Tips gt To select more than one image press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard 325 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Sending Exams via DICOM NOTE Before using this feature make sure that DICOM is properly configured For instructions on configuring DICOM refer to Chapter 7 Utilities Perform the following steps to send the selected exam via DICOM 1 Select exam s and then click Send on the screen The DICOM Storage window will appear Tips gt To select more than one image press the Set button while
300. whether to store SR at the end of the exam When you check this checkbox SR is automatically stored at the end of the exam Otherwise it is not stored 7 38 Chapter 7 Utilities Adding DICOM Services Click Add on the screen A screen is displayed where you can enter a DICOM service to add After adding a service click Save to save the information Click Cancel to cancel E Services Select the type of service to use via DICOM The supported DICOM servers are Storage Print Worklist PPS SC and Storage SR E Alias Enter the name of the DICOM server E AE Title Enter the AE title of the DICOM server Consult your network administrator before specifying this option E Transfer Mode Select a transfer method gt Batch Send all saved images when you click the End Exam key P Send As You Go Send an image whenever you press the Save button to save it gt Manual Send an image selected from the Exam List or in SONOVIEW E Connect Timeout The connection will time out if there is no response within the configured time period You can specify this time period in seconds E IP Address Enter the IP address of the server being used Consult your network administrator before specifying this option E Port No Enter the port number on the server being used Consult your network administrator before specifying this option 7 39 ee MySonoU6 Operation Manual E Retry Interval Specify how long the system w
301. ximum of eight points four points simultaneously selectable Digital dynamic receive focusing continuous Curved Linear Array C2 5 C2 8 C4 9 Linear Array LN5 12 Phased Array P2 4 Endocavity Curved Linear Array EVN4 9 Volume Probe 3DC2 6 3D4 9 CW Probe CW2 0 One probe port Two probe ports for option Hight 23 5mm Width 224 5mm Depth 78 5mm Weight less than 700g 15 inch LCD monitor Type BF 23 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Input Output Connections Video DVI I port Network port USB port Microphone port Audio port Maximum 2 621 frames for CINE memory Image Storage Maximum 8 192 Lines for LOOP memory Image filing system SEA Abdomen Obstetrics Gynecology Musculoskeletal Small Parts Vascular Cardiac Application Pediatric TCD Urology Electrical Parameters Input 100 240VAC 0 7 1 63A 47 63Hz Output 19VDC 7 9A 150W Max Measurement Packages Obstetrics Gynecology Cardiology Carotid Fetal Echo UE Artery LE Artery UE Vein LE Vein Radiology TCD Thyroid Breast Testicle Superficial Pediatric Hips MSK Refer the Chapter 5 for additional information Signal processing Pre processing TGC control Mode independent gain control Acoustic power control adjustable Dynamic aperture Dynamic apodization Dynamic range control adjustable Image view area control M mode sweep speed control Signal processing Post processing
302. y rotating the 3 dial button beneath the soft menu E M Line An M line appears on the image Press the soft menu s dial button 3 to turn the M line on or off The M line indicates where the observed image is located in the 2D image when either M or PW mode is used together with 2D mode E Edge Enhance Allows you to view more accurate images of organ or tissue boundaries Turn the soft menus dial button 4 and select a value between 3 and 3 A higher value provides more accurate images of boundaries E Write Zoom This function allows you to magnify and scan an image in real time 1 Press the dial button The Write Zoom box will appear on the screen 2 Magnify and scan the image Use the Change button to move and resize the Zoom box Each time you press the Change button the current state of the Zoom box is displayed in the lower left of the screen P PreZoom Position Enables you to move the Zoom Box You can move the zoom box by using the trackball P PreZoom Size You can resize the Zoom box Use the trackball to resize the zoom box When using Write Zoom changing Depth automatically finishes Zoom mode 48 Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes E Focus This function is used to define the number of focusing points Rotate the soft menu s dial button 5 and set to a value between 1 and 4 E 2D CLive Press the soft menu s dial button 5 The 2D image and the Color Doppler image for the scanned area can be displaye
303. y the method and range in which an image is acquired and saved You can select ECG Beat Time or Manual Note that ECG Beat can be selected only when ECG is on gt ECG Beat Specify the heart beat as 1 8 beats gt Time Specify it as 1 4 seconds gt Manual Automatically saves four additional seconds of images following the press of the Save button E Cine Loop Period gt Prospective When the Save button on the control panel is pressed during scanning the subsequent images are saved gt Retrospective When the Save button on the control panel is pressed during scanning the previous images are saved NOTE To set up the Store Clip function for the foot switch go to Utility gt Setup gt User Defined Key Foot Switch 7 19 MySonoU6 Operation Manual Display Select the Display tab in the Setup screen to specify display related options Display E Option Select the items that you wish to have displayed on the screen Select an item with the trackball and the Set button to check or uncheck it gt Name Age Select whether to display the name and age underneath the patient ID gt Name Birthday Select whether to display the name and date of birth underneath the patient ID gt TGC Line Sets whether the TGC line will be displayed or not When TGC Line is Off the TGC line appears when you set the TGC line but then disappears after three seconds gt Image Info Show or hide the image informat
304. ySonoU6 Operation Manual gt 3D 4D Mode These modes show 3D images of the region being examined MySono U6 features 3D and 4D optional modes NOTE P Standard probes cannot be used for 3D 4D Modes P 4D mode and 3D XI are optional features in this product 3D Mode You can capture 3D images by using a 3D probe E 4D Mode Optional In 4D Mode 3D images can be obtained in real time with 3D probes This mode is also called Live 3D Mode Starting and Ending 3D 4D Mode Press the 3D 4D button on the control panel This loads the 3D standby screen Press the button again to exit 3D 4D Mode and return to 2D Mode 3D 4D Mode Screen E ROI Box In 3D 4D mode ROI box is also referred to as volume box The box is used to indicate 3D 4D conversion areas You can adjust the position and size of the ROI box by using the Change button on the control panel Each time the Change button is pressed the state of the ROI box is displayed in the lower middle part of the screen as follows gt ROI Position In this state the position of the ROI box can be changed You can move the ROI box by using the trackball gt ROI size In this state the size of the ROI box can be changed After resizing the ROI box with the trackball press the Change button to confirm the new size 4 38 Diagnosis Modes 3D Stand by This screen is displayed when 3D 4D mode is activated This is where you configure the 3D image acquisitio
305. ystem Retrieve the patient list in AE Title specified under the DICOM tab gt Another Retrieve the patient list stored in the AE Title specified by the user N NOTE This option is available only when the Worklist server is enabled B Start Date Specify the range of dates to search gt Today Retrieve the patient list for the current date gt Range Retrieve the patient list form days before and n days after the current date gt Past Week Retrieve the patient list for 7 days before the current date 7 46 Chapter 7 Utilities gt Past Month Retrieve the patient list for a month before the current date P Custom Date Specify a certain date and retrieve the patient list for that date Services WORKLIST Alias AE Title Connect Timeout 415 Show Worklist first when the patient screen opens Update Method Only on user Request On Startup and Every Start Date Today IP Address Port No 494 Scheduled Station AE Title Any This System Another Figure 7 26 DICOM Configuration Worklist 7 47 EE MySonoU6 Operation Manual PPS Server Information Select PPS Performed Procedure Step under Services Configure the Modality Performed Procedure Step Service using DICOM The configuration options are the same as those for the storage server Always complete exams When you check this checkbox exams are always reported in complete condition If you click the Can

read catalog

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents